Home

Lincoln 2011 Navigator User's Manual

Contents

1. The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating 1 Powertrain control module PCM relay Blower motor relay 260 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Trailer tow TT battery charge relay Fuel pump relay jBlectronic fan 1 relay E mirror relay Electrocfan3relay RuvStat R S relay Rear air suspension RAS relay discharge HID headlamp relay 20 _ Netued B _ AC clutch o oa 1 lamp relay CC Right hand HID headlamp relay S p _ _ keep alive power gt 20A9 25A TTparklamprely 29 20A Backup lamps Integrated wheel end solenoid A C clutch relay 261 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 31 J Ntused X 37 YT left hand stop turn relay 38 YT right hand stop turn relay lamps relay Electronic fan 2
2. adipisg a mr pad LL sip ra 5801330 958948 peddmbe sjuro pue uotsuadsns syutof 8 119915 12954 i Ee e e Paha TRUST soponjoA AMP 8415 958918 uus jt o1eouiqn sjurof pue 30101 yoodsuy ej Je sasoy 191545 Surooo 8 12odsu oxe1q Sued pue 59504 sumap 5101041 soous sped yoodsuy 107 xonsdrp uua o49 uorssruisue oreurojne yoodsuy pepueuruiooo1 uorjoedsut 1urod rj mur wod 10 ssouasoo Team astou sjuauoduioo pue s oauA 129454 0 SI TEIM ensnun 930301 ATUO poys s oouA enp YIM SIPA pop peo a1nseour pue 1e9A 12 S Y 91303 1930 pue po autguo rar ar roar sor o6 vs ez o ar oe ve er iS Pax em o ees ov su oe eec s 2 349 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Navigator nav USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide 152 9109 JOAOUOIUAN pas ugs pd L EL HL na
3. 20 english metric button 25 system check button 25 warning messages 26 MITFOIS 75 76 automatic dimming rearview these ead 75 Told AWAY outer onian 76 Heated 77 programmable memory 110 ede ees 77 deciso tier sees 83 Motorcraft parts 294 330 usn 98 N Navigation system 47 Octane uses 315 Oil see Engine oil 300 P Parental MyKey programming usen exten 98 Parking Drake ew 225 Parts see Motorcraft parts 330 Pedals see Power adjustable foot pedals 78 367 Index Power adjustable foot pedals 78 Roadside assistance 258 Power deployable running Roll stability control 226 OAKS sedet 78 Power distribution box S see FUSES 257 260 Power door locks 103 Safety Belt Maintenance 180 Power liftgate 90 Safety belts Power mirrors 76 see Safety restraints 138 140 142 143 145 Power point 71 Power steering 231 Safety Canopy 156 158 fluid checking and adding 324 Safety defects reporting 286
4. XXXX XXXXXXX XX ue MFD E BY F FORD D MOTOR CC 0 ZO m REAR PNBE AR Be 600048 ins its UM XXXX XXXXX 30000X RIMS TANTES XXxXXX AL AkPa PSAPC ox xx COLD A FROID prr MELEES VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIFS2000 500 00 Annum ll mi SPR X XX X XXXX XXX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 206 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The
5. 39 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 VOLUME Press to increase or V to decrease the volume level in the headphones From the rear seat controls volume control can be set no higher than the current radio setting unless the speakers are turned off 3 PP In radio mode press and release to scroll through memory presets Press and hold to seek to the next station In CD mode press and release to advance to the next track Press and hold to fast forward within that track In SYNC modes press and release to advance to the next track Press and hold to fast forward within that track 4 Wired headphone jacks 5 lt In radio mode press and release to scroll through memory presets Press and hold to seek to the next station In CD mode press and release to advance to the next track Press and hold for a fast reverse within that track In SYNC modes press and release to advance to the next track Press and hold for a fast reverse within that track 6 Auxiliary audio input jack Use to plug in and play auxiliary audio sources 7 In CD mode press to access the previous CD 8 In CD mode press to access the next CD 9 A t Press to turn the rear speakers on Single Play mode or off Dual Play mode Parental control The multimedia system allows for three varying levels of parental 2 5 Ce control over rear seat
6. 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Speed dependent wipers When the wiper control is on the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust with the vehicle speed The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the wipers will go Rain sensing wipers The rain sensing wipers will automatically activate when moisture is present on the windshield and the multi function switch is set to one of five auto interval moisture sensitivity settings Rotate the end of the control toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity The speed of the rain sensitive wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the auto interval setting There are no interval intermittent wipe settings on vehicles with rain sensing wipers The wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is detected on the windshield More or less wiping may occur depending on humidity mist or light rain Or road spray Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance may be affected Note During winter driving conditions with ice snow or a salty road mist inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing
7. press 4 and the corresponding memory preset Press and hold to autoeject all discs in the system go up down the frequency band in individual increments In MP3 mode with folder mode active turn to advance to the next previous MP3 folder In satellite radio mode press SEEK to tune to the next previous channel In CATEGORY MODE press turn the TUNE knob to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to Category Mode under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Phone Press to access SYNC phone features For further information please refer to the SYNC supplement 3 TUNE In radio mode turn to 31 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 MENU Press MENU repeatedly to scroll through the following modes SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of c
8. Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut off switch 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no fuel leak is apparent reset the fuel pump shut off switch by pushing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition to the on position Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the off position Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system 255 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Carne Fuse link maxi rating fuses fuses fuses fines cartridge Lo p oe ee a Violet Violet L Pmk 2e e 1 L mw Ta J J o J Lose ex _ ENT NER MS WW NETTE 2A 3A 4A 5A Red Nar Natural 30A Orange Green Green 3 1 Re Re seoa
9. UO KYW SSM LOG pue NIW O TWd 2101010 uorjeogri ods SalLIioVdVO SNOILVOIJ3IO3dS LONGOYd JONVNALNIVIN TV S999W SSM oyeg 331 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Navigator nav USA fus Maintenance and Specifications PANT TEY 2993045 OPT MG2 AVS 2191010 umruodq 10 06M08 AX 06 408 AVS 17 121010 A eNOOSSIN ALV WD S LX J 2 1030 JA V 66106W ISM TO OVIMGLAX V L6TOCN dSM eNOOSMWIN 0 1 ILV AT 11 191010 W 1010 2991045 JITEN Ue 0 AVS 93J 1910 0 N e IdV pue V 0E60GN SSM TO 1010 umrurodq Jadng GISHATOGMS OXD0 06 MGS AVS 1 78101010 sn ZIdST OZMG OXDe 1010 PUAS TINY SA SHM OZMS OXe OZMG AVS 172101010 SN dSO 0ZMS OX 4030 X puerg orjuu S urmrloJq 0 lt 9 AVS 3J J9J0 O N e uorjeogro ods Your 926 o xe squid squid g g VX ping o xe quod JIOAJOSOJI uo s u KYW pue 8 NIN U994419q MA 0899 ping 101857015001 Orjeuroqny IV SD syrenb 19 9 sqzenb 0 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Navigator nav USA fus Maintenan
10. 202 SPATE Jesse reve 264 terminology 185 tre STAGES 184 treadWweat 184 188 MEO WANS 210 recreational towing 216 trailer GOWING 142 5 eere 210 277 Transmission 285 brake shift interlock BSI 233 fluid checking and adding automati 325 fluid refill capacities 331 lubricant specifications 331 Turn signal 4 5 re 58 U Universal garage door opener 84 USB DOE eet 38 V Vehicle Identification Number VIN a osse Recte etitm ei eet 336 Vehicle loading 202 Ventilating your vehicle 221 W Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer uidi 298 Water Driving through 252 369 Windows checking and adding fluid 298 power m t TD ORO A 73 liftgate reservoir 298 rear wiper washer laci Liodes Windshield washer fluid and COE quise 299 iun D 65 Wrecker towing 277 370 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
11. 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 104 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Keyless entry keypad procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all doors the liftgate and liftgate window 3 Enter 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Message center procedure For information on activating deactivating the autolock feature using the vehicle s message center refer to Message center information in the Instrument Cluster chapter Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors liftgate and liftgate window when e the ignition is in the on position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the Off or accessory position and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the off or accessory position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your
12. Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery If your vehicle is equipped with power deployable running boards you may experience noise while deploying the system due to excessive grit and grime buildup While the system is unaffected by this buildup it is importan
13. 2 Grasp the wiper blade and rotate it away from the wiper arm using moderate force until it disengages from the wiper arm 3 Once the wiper blade is loose slide it away from the wiper arm 299 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 To attach the new wiper to the wiper arm align the cross pin and keyway denoted with the arrows gt _ and firmly press the wiper blade o into the wiper arm until an audible snap is heard If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer ENGINE OIL 477 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL 300 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the n
14. 2 RPM X 1000 5 2 2180 110 2004 90 MPH N PM P Note Some warning lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indicator lights and will illuminate in the message center These lights function the same as the other warning lights Service engine soon The indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 12 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD IT has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING
15. 1 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 2 Turn ignition to the on position 3 Start the engine 4 Press SETUP to reach the reset for zone setting screen Press and hold RESET until the message center display prompts you to reset the current zone setting Press RESET 6 Press and release RESET until the message center display changes to show the current zone setting XX 7 Press and release the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center The range of zone values are from 1 to 15 and wraps back to 1 8 To exit the zone setting mode and to lock in your change e press and release SETUP or e press INFO to exit or e wait four seconds and the zone will be locked in 25 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 9 Press RESET to start the compass calibration function 10 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED It will take up to five circles to complete calibration 11 The compass is now calibrated Note If the RESET b
16. Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 162 2011 Navigator nav Own
17. Replacing tail stop turn backup lamp bulbs The tail stop turn backup lamp bulbs are located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly one just below the other Follow the same steps to replace either bulb 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Open the liftgate to expose the lamp assembly screws 3 Remove the two screws from the lamp assembly 4 Carefully pry the lamp assembly away from the vehicle by pulling the assembly directly straight out to expose the bulb socket DO NOT TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS 5 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 6 Pull bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 7 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 8 Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws Replacing supplemental tail lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Open the liftgate and remove interior trim panel 3 Remove four nuts from the lamp assembly 4 Carefully pry the lamp assembly away from the vehicle by pulling the assembly directly straight out to expose the bulb socket DO NOT TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 6 Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb 7 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 8 Install the lamp assembly
18. Slide on rod feature if equipped Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield 68 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package Forward storage bin if equipped The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the storage compartment The door will open to full open position Conversation mirror if equipped On double bin overhead consoles the conversation mirror allows the driver to view the rear seating area WARNING Do not use the conversation mirror to view rearward traffic do not allow rear passengers to distract you from the driving task and make sure the rear view mirror has a clear view of rearward traffic Failure to do so could increase the risk of a crash from an unseen vehicle which may result in serious injury Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the conversation mirror The door will open to full open position The rear view mirror may have to be adjusted to its lower arm position to prevent interference when the conversat
19. Telephone 971 4 3326084 Toll Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 800 89717409 Local Telephone Number for Kuwait 24810575 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations amp Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section 285 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY
20. WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum Use as short an extension cord as possible Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and c
21. is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 203 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS
22. 296 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 4L V8 Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Air filter assembly Power steering fluid reservoir Power distribution box Engine oil filler cap OND co rn Battery 297 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with
23. Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e seat mounted side airbags Refer to Seat mounted side airbag system later in this chapter e Safety Canopy System Refer to Safety Canopy System later in this chapter 155 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e one or more impact and safing sensors and diagnostic monitor RCM e a readiness light and tone e the electrical wiring which connects the components The RCM restraints control module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag backup power and the airbag ignitors Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights amd chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either 9 flash or stay lit ry e T
24. Entertainment Systems Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible e Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system include hardware and a limited subscriptio
25. appropriate for their age height and weight children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and 165 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http Awww sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Re
26. deploying airbag YII WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided 4 WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module 152 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the airbag module Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front s
27. device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle 242 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not use the camera system with the liftgate open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the reverse camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer CONTROL
28. information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You ma
29. may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected 191 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result i
30. power mirrors adjustable pedals and 1 2 steering column to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver s seat e To program position 1 move the driver seat and mirrors to the desired position using the associated controls Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds A chime will sound confirming that a memory position has been set e program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using button 2 A memory seat position may be programmed at any time To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter refer to Remote entry system in the Locks Security chapter A programmed memory position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is on The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter unlock control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position The mirrors will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition if easy entry feature is enabled Climate controlled seats if equipped Note It is recommended for optimal performance that the vehicle air conditioning system be run in the same mode either heating or cooling as the climate control seat
31. the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off Rear window wiper washer controls For rear wiper operation rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position Select 2 Normal speed operation of rear wiper 1 Intermittent operation of rear wiper O off Rear wiper and washer off For rear wash cycle rotate and hold as desired the rear wiper washer control to either GJ position From either position the control will automatically return to the 2 or O off position 66 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER TILT STEERING The steering column can be adjusted manually by moving the two way rocker adjustment control located below the turn signal wiper control stalk Hold the control to adjust The tilt function is adjusted by depressing the control up or down Easy entry exit feature When you remove the key from the ignition the column will move to the full up position if this feature is activated through the message center Refer to Message center in the Imstrument Cluster chapter When the key is inserted into the ignition the column will return to the previous setting Note The easy entry exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from returning to the memory position until the key is inserted into the ignition Memory feature The steering column positions a
32. 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy 319 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy as much as 1 mpg 0 4 knvL is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel e
33. 40 minutes after the ignition is turned off to accommodate any load changes The air compressor may run when the vehicle is off this is normal The air suspension system can be enabled or disabled through the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter If the system is off the rear air suspension will not operate and will not raise pump or lower vent while the vehicle is not moving However if the system determines that the vehicle is low or high and needs to make a height adjustment while driving at speeds above 15 mph 24 km h the system will pump or vent as required Normal vehicle operation does not require any action by the driver WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn the air suspension and the ignition switch off prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle 232 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving PREPARING TO DRIVE WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger Car WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Uti
34. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Airbag readiness If this light fails e to illuminate when the ignition is 9 turned to on continues to flash SIN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABs Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder A chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Anti theft system Flashes when 2 the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has bee
35. Close the access hole with the rubber plug Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and secure it with the wing nut turn clockwise until tight WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque M14 x 2 0 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners 272 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease ar
36. DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to Attp www safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx 286 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer
37. DIP switch settings from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled 4 After inputting switch settings simultaneously press and release all three Car2U system buttons The indicator lights will turn on 5 Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the garage door Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves During this time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Do not release the button until you see the garage door move Most garage doors open quickly You may need to hold the button from 5 55 seconds before observing movement of the garage door 6 The indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete If your garage door opener does not operate following these steps repeat Steps 2 through 6 Otherwise call the toll free Car2U help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command 88 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons Note The system allows for three devices to be programme
38. GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 1596 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 Ib 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 Ib 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label 207 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitatio
39. Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 175 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAAB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temper
40. If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry off and remove the chrome trim ring 1 from the shifter bezel base 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry the trim panel 2 up and disconnect it from the console to expose the inside of the gearshift 4 Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly 5 Apply the brake pedal and turn the ignition key to the on position Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into X the N Neutral position 6 Install the trim panel Z and chrome ring 1 in reverse order 7 Apply brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the
41. Instrument Cluster Door ajar RTT if equipped Displays when the ignition is in the D 4 on position and any door liftgate or the liftgate glass is open d Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the a gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking brake on warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h Turn signal chime Sounds when the turn signal lever has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 1 5 miles 2 4 km Message center activation chime Sounds when some warning messages appear in the message center display for the first time Reverse warning chime if equipped Sounds when the vehicle is in R Reverse Refer to the Driving chapter for more information 17 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the curren
42. OK to close and return to the main menu Fade Press A IV to adjust the audio between the front and rear speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu Speed sensitive volume Radio volume automatically changes slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A IV to adjust Recommended level is 1 3 Level 7 is the maximum setting Press OK to close and return to the main menu Occupancy mode Use A IV to select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or FRONT SEATS Press OK to close and return to the main menu Compression Available in CD mode this feature brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level Press MENU until compression status is displayed Press A IV to turn the feature on off Press OK to close and return to the main menu FES options if equipped Some FES options will also be available when scrolling through the menu See Family entertainment DVD system in the Entertainment systems chapter for more information 5 v A Select These controls are used in Menu mode to select various settings options 6 gt Il Play Pause OK In CD MP3 and USB mode only press to pause the playing media Press again to return to the playing media OK Use in various menu selections 7 SEEK gt In radio or CD MP3 mode press to access the next strong station or track In satellite radio mode press SEEK p to seek to the next channel Press and
43. ON you can search RBDS equipped stations for certain program types or announcements Alert and Test When the desired category appears in the display press d SEEK to initiate the search The system will cycle through the FM frequency band searching for stations broadcasting the selected category type If the desired program type is not found after searching the frequency band three times the search will stop The announcement categories are as follows e Alert Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting important messages relating to weather or government emergencies e Test Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting a test message Autoset In radio mode this allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FMI FM2 Use W to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets Press OK to close and return to the main menu Bass Press to adjust the bass setting Press OK to close and return to the main menu 33 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Treble Press A IV to adjust the treble setting Press OK to close and return to the main menu Balance Press A IV to adjust the audio between the right and left speakers Press
44. TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning lamp will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle 199 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system L
45. TRAC FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4X4 OPERATION IF EQUIPPED WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter Do not use 4X4 mode on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces Use of 4X4 mode on these surfaces may produce some noise such as occasional clunks but will not damage drive components Your 4x4 features the heavy duty Control Trac system which includes a computer operated transfer case This unique system is interactive with the road continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control 243 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 4WD indicator lights The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the reconfigurable telltale RTT location under the following conditions Refer to Warning lights chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter e 4X2 Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected 4x2 e 4X4 AUTO Illuminates when 4X4 AUTO is selected 4x4 AUTO e 4X4 Illuminates when 4X4 is 4 4 selected Modes of the Control Trac system The Control Trac system functions in three modes e 4X2 2WD delivers power to T the rear wheels only The axe AUTO AXA message center will mome
46. Tow Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D Overdrive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed To deactivate the Tow Haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated 236 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving When you shut off and restart the engine the transmission will automatically return to normal D Overdrive mode Tow Haul OFF WARNING Do not use the Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 3 Third Transmission operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Transmission operates in 2nd gear only Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to
47. USA fus 225 Driving Pull the release lever to release the brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction control system TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic stability control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injur
48. Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Powertrain malfunction reduced power RTT if equipped y Displays when the vehicle has defaulted to a limp home operation Report the fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity Check 4X4 RTT if equipped Displays with the message CHECK y 4X4 when a four wheel drive fault is present When this warning appears have your vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer Refer to the Driving chapter for more information on four wheel drive operation Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the B HAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer 18 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous
49. a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information 2WD and 4WD vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted See your authorized dealer if you must flat tow a vehicle equipped with the Control Trac 4WD system In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 216 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off locks the steering wheel automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal 2 Accessory allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running 3 all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key onc
50. activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The stability control light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction control system TCS The TCS is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem engine traction control and brake traction control Engine traction control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake traction control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction control is most active at low speeds During TCS events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash If the TCS system is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation TCS will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control
51. amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Index A Axle lubricant specifications 331 ABS see Brakes 224 refill capacities 331 Accessory delay 74 B 280 Battery 303 Air cleaner filter 325 330 acid treating emergencies 303 Air suspension 232 jumping a disabled en battery 274 description 232 maintenance free 308 Airbag supplemental replacement specifications 330 restraint system 152 156 158 303 and child safety seats 154 Belt Minder 148 description 152 156 158 disposal 161 Booster seats 177
52. and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUVs and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 182 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wh
53. available for all models To find out what accessories are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www lincolnaccessories com U S only Exterior style eChrome hood accent e Deflectors eSplash guards e Custom graphics Interior style e Ambient lighting eFloor mats e Backlit door sill plates e Custom seat covers Lifestyle eSUV camping tent e Rear seat entertainment eRacks and carriers e Subwoofer e Cargo organization and management 338 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories Peace of mind eRemote start e Vehicle security systems e Windshield wiper shaker e Wheel locks e Vehicle tracking and recovery eBack up alarm eProtective seat covers eLocking gas plug for capless fuel system eFactory navigation system software upgrades Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and lug
54. causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline and or ethanol vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction e FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 8596 ethanol Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor beer and wine It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels a small amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 296 to 596 gasoline and is suitable for automotive use During the summer season fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 8596 denatured ethanol Ed85 and 1596 unleaded gasoline The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power Winter blends may contain up to 75 denatured ethanol Ed75 an
55. click is not heard use the switch to fold the mirrors out then in until the click is heard After that the mirrors will operate to their normal positions until they are again moved manually Note 10 or more switch activations within one minute or repeated folding unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during full travel may cause the system to disable the fold unfold function to protect motors from overheating Should this occur wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off for the system to reset and for function to return to normal Heated outside mirrors 1 Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Signal indicator mirrors When the turn signal is activated the lower portion of the mirror housing will blink 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift 4 lever is in the P Park position Press and hold the rocker
56. collisions and rollovers This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Safety restraints section in this chapter 139 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Determining if the restraint system is operational The restraint system uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights amd chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the restraint system is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors and the driver seat position sensor In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of t
57. concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 4096 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 4096 e A coolant concentration of 4096 will provide freeze point protection down to 12 F 24 C Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The engine coolant temperature symbol will illuminate e The C indicator light will illuminate If the engine reach
58. conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 247 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Emergency maneuvers e n an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as
59. control to v adjust accelerator and brake pedal e Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals toward you e Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals away from you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS IF EQUIPPED Deployable running boards DRB automatically move when the doors are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle Automatic power deploy e The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are opened Automatic power stow e The running boards will return to the stowed position when the doors are closed There will be a two second delay before the running boards move in to the stowed position Manual power deploy To manually operate the running boards refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter e This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed OUT position for access to the roof e When running boards are manually set in the deployed position the boards will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h 78 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Enable disable To enable disable the power running board feature refer to Message center in the Imstrument Cluster chapter e When this feature is disabled OFF the r
60. debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube It is not necessary to completely remove the clamp 4 Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner housing 5 Release the three clamps that secure the cover to the air filter housing Push the air filter cover toward the center of the vehicle and up slightly to release it 326 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 6 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 7 Install a new air filter element 8 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover and ensure that the tabs on the edge are properly aligned into the slots 9 Slip the air tube onto the air filter housing and tighten the air tube clamp bolt snugly but do not overtighten it 10 Reconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector to the outlet tube Make sure the locking tab on the connector is in the locked position connector shown from below for clarity 327 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any d
61. displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon C indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mi
62. does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer If required fluid should be added by an authorized dealer Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical connector on the air outlet tube This connector will need to be unplugged 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Unlock the locking clip on the connector connector shown from below for clarity then squeeze and pull the connector off of the air outlet tube 3 Clean the area around the air tube to air cover connection to prevent
63. drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 201 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle e Use only cable type chains or chains offered by Ford as an accessory or equivalent Other conventional link type chains may contact and cause damage to the vehicl
64. driver airbag 154 157 159 Brakes eene 223 indicator light 156 161 antilock reisene 224 operation 154 157 159 anti lock brake system passenger airbag 154 157 159 ABS warning light 224 SIGE 156 fluid checking and adding 324 Antifreeze fluid refill capacities 331 fluid specifications 331 E ii lubricant specifications 331 Anti lock brake system parkiftg aee erre eon 225 see 224 shift interlock 233 Anti theft system DI MEE MR 60 arming the system 118 disarming a triggered C systemene a 119 Audio system see Radio 30 Capacities for refilling fluids 331 Automatic transmission Car2U Home Automation driving an automatic 84 OVETOTIVG 285 Qargo cover nain 95 fluid adding se 325 fluid checking 325 Cargo management system 95 fluid refill capacities 331 Cell phone use 9 fluid specification 331 Changing a 264 Auxiliary input jack Child safety seats 166 Lime IN 36 Wi fron BEAR Lr e 167 Auxiliary power point 71 I Tear Seat 167
65. e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear If your vehicle is equipped with a floor shift transmission press the gearshift lever release button on the front of the lever while shifting into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 235 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive with Tow Haul Off D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six D Overdrive with Tow Haul On The Tow Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing trailer or a heavy load transmission gear ranges are available when using Tow Haul To activate Tow Haul press the button on the side of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL indicator light will TOW illuminate in the instrument cluster HAUL
66. engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off 3 Make sure the gearshift is in P Park PRND321 218 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 4 Make sure the parking brake is set 5 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 219 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guid
67. features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes a stability control button on the center of the instrument panel and a stability control light in the instrument cluster The stability control light in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check or during driving if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the stability control light illuminates steadily verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled by pressing the stability control button located on the center of the instrument panel If the stability control light remains steadily illuminated have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The message center will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system 227 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that
68. flat surface at parking speeds Traffic control systems inclement weather air brakes and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system this may include reduced performance or a false activation A WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the sensing system 239 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the forward and reverse sensing system may create false beeps The system will sound a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near either bumper in the following manner e The front sensors will sound a high pitched tone which will appear to come from the dashboard e The rear sensors will sound a lower pitched tone which will appear to come from the rear interior of the vehicle e The sensing system will report the obstacle which is closest to the front or rear of the vehicle For example if an obstacle is 12 inches 30 cm from the front of the vehicle and at the same
69. fluid refill capacity 331 aa Boxed afety restraints 138 140 fluid Speciiicanons 331 142 143 145 Power Windows 73 Belt Minder 148 Preparing to drive your extension assembly 147 Vel ele eese cope RR Niet 233 for adults 5 e 142 143 for children 162 R safety belt maintenance 180 warning light and chime 147 RadiO aes rtm 30 Safety restraints LATCH Rear heated seats 135 anchors es r tete 170 Rear view camera system 241 Safety seats for children 166 Recommendations for Safety Compliance attaching safety restraints for Certification Label 335 children eee 164 Satellite Radio Information 44 Relays UAR peas Su ERA VONT CROIRE TA 256 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Remote entry system 107 108 Normal Scheduled illuminated entry 112 Maintenance and Log 348 locking unlocking What Maintenance Schedule cu rss eorr beri 108 109 Should You Follow 346 opening the trunk 109 Sede tanen d 120 panic alarm 110 child safety seats 186 replacement additional cleaning deo cnius 293 transmitters eee 111 climate control 197 replacing the bat
70. function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained If coolant is filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is not cool the system will remain underfilled WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield 306 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and new unused coolant together in the vehicle Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities in this chapter e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system mus
71. hold SEEK to fast seek through the next channels In CATEGORY MODE press A IV to select a category 34 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In TEXT MODE press TEXT and then SEEK to view the additional display text when gt is active in the display Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 8 FWD Fast Forward Press FWD to manually advance in a CD MP3 track ERES 9 TEXT SCAN In radio mode press and hold for a brief sampling amp of radio stations In CD MP3 mode press and release to view the track title artist name or disc title Press and hold for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc In satellite radio mode press and release to enter TEXT MODE and toggle between channel name channel category and the current song title artist In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press TEXT and then SEEK p to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press TEXT and then lt q SEEK to view the previous display text 10 A REV Reverse Press REV to manually reverse in a CD track 11 SEEK In radio and lt CD MP3 mode press to access the previous strong station or track In satellite radio mode press lt SEEK to seek to the prev
72. hours to make your service visit more convenient How s that for quality service Factory trained technicians Ford and Lincoln Mercury service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received 345 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft branded replacement parts These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications and we stand behind them Parts installed at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership carry a nationwide 12 months 12 000 mile 20 000 km parts and labor limited warranty Your dealer can give you details Value shopping for your vehicle s maintenance needs Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and light repair automotive services With factory trained technicians and one stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire rotations to repairs like brake service check out the value your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealers can offer WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW Owner checks and services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicat
73. information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches your request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information 8 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We
74. it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage FFV engines Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel Ethanol Ed75 Ed85 Regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and your warranty may be invalidated It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible at least half a tank Do not add less than five gallons 18 9L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration If you exclusively use E85 fuel it is recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change 315 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fuel quality Unleaded gasoline engines If you experience starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of Regular unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your author
75. lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 250 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control When you brake hard the front wheels can t turn and if they aren t turning you won t be able to steer The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control If your vehicle has anti lock brakes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice Four wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the sl
76. may occur In these conditions you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of smearing or override the feature by selecting low or high speed wiping or turning the wiper system off Note The wipers must be turned off before entering a car wash Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e a long press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds 65 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper rainlamp feature if equipped with autolamp When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position
77. of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m
78. on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine Al a Dl l gt e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 289 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner suc
79. or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C with recirculation mode selected turn off the rear A C unit reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the P Park position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance MAX A C e n AUTO Press AUTO control and set to desired temperature n manual override Press the panel A C and recirculated air lt set the temperature to 60 F 16 C and the fan to the highest blower setting To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 30 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL 1 Fan spe
80. recently cleared 102 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security POWER DOOR LOCKS Press control to unlock all doors Press control to lock all doors Smart locks This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the vehicle with the power door lock control on the driver or passenger door trim panel all the doors will lock then all doors will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by locking the driver s door with a key using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your integrated keyhead transmitter or locking the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad If both front doors and the liftgate are closed the vehicle can be locked from any method regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not Autolock The autolock feature will lock all the doors liftgate and liftgate window when e all doors are closed e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h 103 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then clos
81. recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 10 amp xe il O See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warni
82. relay o a 1 Notused Cd Noted O Noted _ Netued mirror relay feed TCM R S feed Fuel pump relay coil R S feed 30A Passenger compartment fuse panel R S feed Blower motor relay coil TT backup lamps 262 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies M One touch start diode touch start diode E _ 6 _ Left HID headlamp relay 65 20 Auxiliary power point instrument panel 20 Auxiliary power point rear of center console 68 BOA ABS valves OA ABS pump O LH 8 jAutiary power point cigar lighter 20A Auxiliary power point right rear quarter panel 73 _ i eee RR RN 79 O 8l O 82 O 83 Netued O 84 p 85 oo Wiper motor relay Mini Fuses Cartridge Fuses 263 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring
83. repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 279 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5 4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FO
84. reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent 318 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added
85. soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 1596 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue WARNING The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part of the vehicle rear crash safety structure Do not remove the trailer hitch Failure to follow this warning could compromise vehicle crash structure and increase the risk of injury in a rear end collision 212 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Integrated hitch rating The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of operation e Weight carrying requires a draw bar and hitch ball The draw bar supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer e Weight distributing requires an aftermarket weight distributing system which includes draw bar hitch ball spring bars and snap up brackets The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between the truck and the trailer by this system Maximum Trailer Maximum Tongue Weight Ib kg Weight Ib kg Weight carrying 6000 2721 600 272 Weight distributing 9000 4082 900 408 These are hitch ratings only actual vehicle ratings are dependent on engine transmission and axle combinations WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the limit of the towing system and could re
86. specified inter vals and to record all vehicle service Class A Motorhome Every two years Change brake fluid 361 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Hot climate oil change intervals C If operating conditions are normal and you drive your Ford Lincoln or Mercury vehicle under typical everyday conditions and you are using an API performance category oil of SL or later for example SM etc then you can follow the 7 500 mile 12 000 km normal service oil change intervals schedule Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates must follow the oil change interval of 3 000 mile 5 000 km if the owner is using oils defined by the American Petroleum Institute API performance category of API SK or earlier for ex ample SJ efc Engine air filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure fo dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter COOLANT CHANGE RECORD initial change 6 years or 105 000 miles 168 000 km whichever comes first After initial change every 3 years or 45 000 miles 72 000 km 362 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Engine coolant change log Deater VALIDATION P
87. system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels amd Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimi
88. tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the NA bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission ven
89. that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 205 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX IXXXXXXX amp TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXXiXX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX PSLCOLD ATO KPa xX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX _ XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TPPS R TAXLE SPR XXX X X XX XX
90. the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e guide sleeve adjust release button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove button 4 To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 120 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint Y Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position 121 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Simultane
91. the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance includin
92. the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights Cooled seats The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the cooled seats Press the cooled seat symbol to A C cycle through the various cooling settings and off Cooler settings are indicated by more indicator lights The cooled seats will turn off after 30 minutes If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated 126 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Climate controlled seats air filtrer replacement if equipped The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be replaced periodically Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for more information e There is a filter located under each front seat e The filter can be accessed from the second row seat Move the front seats all the way forward and up to ease access remove an air filter 1 Remove key from ignition 2 Push up on the outside rigid edge of the filter and rotate toward the front of the vehicle once tabs are released 3 Remove filter 127 2
93. the vehicle to reach the de 16 sired temperature A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with lt recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO 97 defrost and GA floor defrost 17 EXT Press to display the outside temperature Press again to display cabin temperature settings Note Exterior readings are more accurate when the vehicle is moving 18 in lt Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation the vehicle cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air can be engaged manually in any airflow selection except 47 Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow selections Operating tips 52 To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 97 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged Under normal weather conditions do not leave the air flow selector in A C and recirculated air cc or with the system off when the vehicle is parked This allows the vehicle to breathe using the outside air inlet vents Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats Remove any snow ice
94. the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition and will continue to function during the cool down period The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off traction control section following 228 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Electronic stability control ESC Electronic stability control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During ESC events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa e Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Traile
95. to continue to function properly The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the 198 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire wheel cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system
96. turn off the lamps TURN SIGNAL CONTROL e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn ose signal Y INTERIOR LAMPS Front row map lamps To turn on the map lamps press the outer edge of the clear lens The front row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated until the courtesy lamps come on e the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off 58 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Front row map dome lamp if equipped The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on and e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of the lens Second row map lamps The second row map lamps are located in the headliner above the second row seats The second row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on and e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off Press the controls to activate the lamps Rear cargo lamp The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened and the switch is in t
97. x 100 1400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pick up trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this owner s guide WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle 209 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension For your safety and to maximize ve
98. 011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints install a filter e First position the filter in its housing making sure that the far forward end is all the way up in the housing Then push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position REAR SEATS Folding down the 2nd row 40 seat system WARNING Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position as the system will move forward when you lift the release handle Ensure that the head restraint is in the down position and no objects such as books purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down Move the front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat headrest clears the front seat For assistance refer to the label located on the side of the seat cushion 1 Lower the head restraints by y pulling on the strap N 128 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Locate handle on the side of the seat cushion by the door 3 Pull up on the handle and push the seatback forward toward the front of the vehicle To return the seat to the upright position 1 Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Rotate the seatback until you hear a click locking it in the upright position 3 Lift up on the head restr
99. 011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety Canopy System 20 WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision MESES WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy System its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canop
100. 1e3uoouo SM V Z8 0Z p 9TUSDUIAA UMTWUIIG 178191010 H 99I10GW dSH 9580 TW T 9 EXT ZI IX I JSULIL 3J 424030 A syrenb 9 T 9 T I JSULIL uorjeogro ods eo eo 3 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Navigator nav USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 5 4L V8 Engine 87 octane or E 85 Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0 039 0 043 inch 1 05 0 05mm 334 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine drivebelt routing IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO that a Safety Compliance DATE GVWR XXXXXLB KXXXXKG eae FRONT GAWR XXXXL EARGAWR XXXXLB Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG WITH WITH vehicle and prescribe where the eu y Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX kPa C PSICOL AT OQUC PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR C li Certification Label i VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Label 15 EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE Pi VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX located on the structure B Pillar by the trailing edge of the driver s door EXT PNT XX
101. 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Within three seconds press the c 3 A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete 4 Repeat this procedure for transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The integrated keyhead transmitter IKT or intelligent access key IA key uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent Integrated keyhead transmitter IKT replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key ring to remove the battery cover 1 Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board 2 Carefully peel up the rubber gasket 2 from the transmitter if it does not come off with battery cover 3 Remove the old battery 8 Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity Snap the battery cover back onto the key Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT or IA key to become de programmed from your vehicle They should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs If you would like to have your integrated keyhead transmitters reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional IKTs you can
102. 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Customer Assistance 279 Reporting safety defects U S only 286 Reporting safety defects Canada only 286 Cleaning 287 Maintenance and Specifications 295 Engine compartment 297 Engine oil 300 Battery 303 Engine coolant 305 Fuel information 311 Air filter s 325 Part numbers 330 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 331 Engine data 334 Accessories 338 Ford Extended Service Plan 340 Scheduled Maintenance Guide 344 Normal scheduled maintenance and log 348 Index 364 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2010 Ford Motor Company 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e n the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Mexico www ford com mx e In Au
103. 28 3 Return to your vehicle Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the O O O garage door You may need to hold the button from 5 20 seconds during which time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves When the button is released the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete 86 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 4 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful If your garage door does not operate repeat the previous steps in this section After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 4 substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener For example you could assign the left most button to the garage door the center button to a security device and the right most button to another garage door opener Note The Car2U system allows for three devic
104. 364 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus LATCH aep em eie tkt 170 recommendations 164 Child safety seats booster Seals cortice tome eee RE HUP ed 177 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 289 instrument panel 290 interior ae teinii 291 292 plastic parts 289 WASTING esce 287 288 wheels rrr 288 wiper blades 290 71 Compass electronic set zone adjustment 2b Console tette eie 70 Overhead nene 69 70 Controls powerseal ordenes 123 steering column 82 Coolant checking and adding 305 refill capacities 308 331 Specifications 331 Cruise control see Speed control 80 Customer Assistance 253 Ford Extended Service Plat et er ii 340 343 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada 283 Getting roadside assistance 253 Getting the service you need 279 Ordering additional owner s 285 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Program scr teres cases 283 D Daytime running lamps see Lamp
105. 5 are ere 296 I Ignition 22 ee 217 334 335 Illuminated visor mirror 68 Infant seats see Safety seats 166 Inspection maintenance I M 323 Instrument panel cleaning 290 iioii 12 J UE 264 positioning ecce teens 264 SUOTASE 264 Jump starting your vehicle 274 K Keyless entry system autolock arrra 103 keypad 113 locking and unlocking OOPS eee 114 programming entry code 113 KEYS cies co re rus 97 116 positions of the ignition 217 L Lamps autolamp system bulb replacement specifications chart 60 daytime running light 56 fog lamps 55 headlamps ttt ets 55 headlamps flash to pass 56 interior lamps 58 59 61 replacing bulbs 64 LATCH anchors 170 Liftgate tret 90 109 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 224 Load WMS REG 202 Loading instructions 209 Locks 103 childproot 107 OOPS 103 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lubricant specifications 331 Lug nuls ette 272 Lumbar support seats 123 M Message center
106. 58101330 958948 peddmbo ojeouqnr squtol q 3yeuseAup uorsuedsns peq e8exurp 158 32edsug odio 7 sux uisa ode sponge AMP 880310 958918 ur poddmbe jt sjuro pue guo 1299 SANS HS pur wis mmi L ERES e auus oxe1q Sued pue sosoq 1001 sped oxe1q yoodsuy 107 Jopeop 31015000 yoysdip uj p ddmb ping 1015510500 oreurojne 1294 uonoedsur jurod nnur SEIP 559195001 TEIM astou sjuouoduroo poje o1 pue yoodsuy _ 998701 ATUO 5 enp YIM pue yoodsut o1e303 pos ae oe pae UI GUB 96 06 vs 82 0z voz zor OST gor zer 000 soyoutorry ser fezer oer os sss 000077 3 sot 350 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Navigator nav USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Every 15 000 miles Replace cabin air filter Gf equipped 24 000 km Every 30 000 m
107. 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 163 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 164 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manu
108. A 1883 Batter BXT 65 650 or BXT 65 750 if i equipped Oil filter FL 820 S Spark plugs For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 330 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications xne qj MO 3ue ooo peup o8ue 10 8D d een mes xn YM JOIWIPeI C Prdl6N SSM 31819945 g J I910 10 A e 3 0 6 oseq que ooo 8 epeuey 9 6 9 9 Sm joy 2091 xne JHOUJIAY SM 6 jue8y 8 10 9 8 Sj1enb 601 Ayetseds g3J e124030 N e 71981 53 61 1 MO Jo rer 3ue ooo 1709 xn jnoujIA oseq 1ue ooo susug 1891 sj1enb 91 jueonqnT pue 3 Suds pue guw 58918 ong sxoex quopeAmbo osodanq nmygyq yeas 51001 pue 10 GTX 40 p DX Joxuns soyoyey pmi e pneA I0JOW
109. CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the braking system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to the Driving chapter for more information 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS Displayed when the 4X4 system is making a shift For more information refer to Control trac fowr wheel drive 4X4 operation in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving For more information refer to Control trac four wheel drive 4X4 operation in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped For more information refer to Control trac four wheel drive 4X4 operation in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Control trac
110. EAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide EXCEPTIONS In addition there are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehicle axle maintenance Rear axles and power take off PTO units containing synthetic lubricant and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected service is re quired or the axle assembly has been submerged in water The axle and PTO lubricant should be changed anytime the axle and PTO have been submerged in water During extended trailer tow operation above 70 F 21 C ambient and wide open throttle for extended periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle lubricants should be replaced every 3 000 miles 4 800 km or 3 months whichever occurs first The 3 000 mile 4 800 km lubricant change interval may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles refer to Maintenance product and specifications in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details
111. EY MILES This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey is used If mileage does not accumulate as expected then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by clearing MyKey If this odometer is lower than the last time you checked then the MyKey system has been recently cleared e MYKEY S PROGRAMMED Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect deletion of a MyKey e ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey system warnings displays Using MyKey with remote start systems MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system When using a Ford approved remote start system the default settings will recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges You should program the remote start system as a MyKey in addition to the key that you have already programmed as a MyKey To program the remote start system as MyKey do the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using a remote start
112. Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered 6 4 6 5 78 6 5 within five seconds of each other 4 Press 1 e 2 on the keypad to assign the Driver 1 setting The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that your personal entry code has been programmed You can store up to three personal entry codes The above procedure shows how to set the Driver 1 setting To assign the additional settings repeat Steps 1 through 3 then for Step 4 do one of the following e Press 3 e 4 to assign the Driver 2 setting e Press 5 6 7 8 or 9 e 0 to assign the Driver setting Tips e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 113 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad
113. FACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR 19 TAXLE SPR XX X XX X XX LXXX Xxx XN XXXX XXXXXXX XX Six speed automatic 6R80 D 6 337 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories LINCOLN CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Lincoln Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Following is a list of several Lincoln Custom Accessories Not all accessories are
114. FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE movere sec OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 60 PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY 1 TFRONT p TRER g NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 AVANT 1 ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou COLD TIRE PRESSURE TIRE PRESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR e ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 INFORMATION P235 70R16 240 KPA as VORLEMANUEL SPARE POUR PLUS DE secours 1145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX A U x x x x x x x lt x x R x CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 204 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight
115. II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon E indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon C indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 323 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run
116. ION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide 353 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 354 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your Ford Lincoln Me
117. If the transmission transfer case front axle or rear axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a
118. LD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 305 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir m SS ERO COLD FILL RANGE es e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL or MIN MAX range as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
119. ND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 288 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20
120. NG Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the brake pedals Position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and A press down to lock in Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure zc POWER LIFTGATE The liftgate can be operated by the following e Instrument panel control button e Transmitter button e Outside control button e Control button in the rear cargo area Note The liftgate can be reversed with a second press on a control button or transmitter and can be manually closed at any time Opening and closing the power liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of reach of children Do not allow children to play near an open or moving power liftgate The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P Park The chime will beep once if conditions are not correct to start an operation These conditions include e The ignition is in on and the transmission is not in P Park e The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage 90 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverse
121. ODLEOL eet description driving off road indicator light preparing to drive your calculating fuel ECONOMY 22 818 Caps ener nee a choosing the right fuel detergent in fuel filler funnel filling your vehicle with uel aerei eren 311 314 318 filter specifications 311 330 fuel pump shut off switch improving fuel economy octane rating 315 334 335 running out of fuel 273 316 safety information relating to automotive fuels 366 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Fuel flex fuel vehicle CREW 311 315 FUSES eene 256 257 G Garage door opener 84 Gas cap see Fuel cap 314 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 318 GallBeS D GERE 18 H Hazard flashers 254 Headlamps intr E T 57 autolamp system bulb specifications 60 daytime running lights 56 flash to pass utes 56 high Hean aee ies 56 turning on and off 5
122. OU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS 32 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Your vehicle is equipped with an in dash clock Refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to set the time RBDS ON OFF Press W turn RBDS ON or OFF Program Type If RBDS is ON press A IV to find the desired program type Info Information Religious R amp B Classical Jazz Oldies Country Top 40 Soft and Rock or alert and test announcements Press lt q SEEK p or SCAN to search for FM radio stations broadcasting the desired program type RBDS Radio Broadcast Data System Available in FM mode only When RBDS is
123. RCXX 090 WBTBRK INTTR IPPS TR AXLE SPR TXXXXX XX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX 395 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your Re vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number 336 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE GUWR XOQQXLB XXXXXKG Label The following table tells you FRONT GAR XXXXL REARGANR which transmission each code XXXXKG H XXXXKG WITH represents XO A AT XXX PSLOOLI XXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANU
124. RD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 280 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the ext
125. Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 50 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 5 Rear fan speed control Press to enable the auxiliary system or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed When the rear fan button is pressed the display will show only the rear cabin settings After the rear setting changes are completed on the front control the display will automatically show all climate settings 6 aj Passenger heated seat control if equipped Press to activate deactivate the passenger heated seat See Climate controlled seats in the Seating amd Safety Restraints chapter T Passenger cooled seat control if equipped Press to activate deactivate the passenger cooled seat See Climate controlled seats in the Seating amd Safety Restraints chapter 8 REAR Press to enable the control located in the rear floor console if equipped Press again to turn the auxiliary system off When the REAR button is pressed the display will show only the rear cabin settings After the rear setting changes are completed on the front control the display will automatically show all climate settings 9 Airflow direction control Press to toggle through the air distribution modes listed below The selected mode will be shown in th
126. Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned 304 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive 5 batteries in a responsible manner S Follow your local authorized lt standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the CO
127. SET when reaching this menu from the setup sequence or put the vehicle in D DRIVE and press RESET TRAILER SWAY if equipped This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway Press the RESET button to turn trailer sway on or off CREATE MYKEY CLEAR MYKEY MYKEY SETUP For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks amd Security chapter 24 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster COMPASS The compass heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE S SW W and NW in the message center display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Do the following to set the proper zone Compass zone calibration adjustment
128. T complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 107 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The IKT allows you to e remotely unlock the vehicle doors e remotely lock all the vehicle doors e remotely open the power liftgate or manual liftgate window if equipped e activate the personal alarm e arm and disarm the perimeter anti theft system e operate the illuminated entry feature The remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position except while the key is held in the start position The panic feature operates with the key in the off position If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL integrated keyhead transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in tr
129. T 15 Switch backlighting Puddle lamps TOA Noted spare O 7 5A Power mirrors Driver seat gt Notused spre O Power liftgate module keep alive power Clock satellite module Liftglass release Fog lamps 258 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protective Circuits a a ee 2224 20A Hom 35 10A Rear park assist 4x4 Rear video a 41 15A Power windows Power vents Power moonroof Auto dimming rear view mirror 110V AC power point Not used spare Rear wiper logic Rain sensor coil control Breaker 48 Delayed accessory relay 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter
130. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 18 Message center 20 Entertainment Systems 30 AM FM stereo with CDX6 MP3 30 Auxiliary input jack Line in 36 USB port 38 Rear seat controls 39 Satellite radio information 44 Navigation system 47 SYNC 47 Climate Controls 48 Dual automatic temperature control 48 Rear window defroster 54 Lights 55 Headlamps 55 Turn signal control 58 Bulb replacement 60 Driver Controls 65 Windshield wiper washer control 65 Steering wheel adjustment 67 Power windows 73 Mirrors 75 Speed control 80 Moon roof 83 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Locks and Security 97 Keys 97 Locks 103 Anti theft system 114 Seating and Safety Restraints 120 Seating 120 Safety restraints 138 Airbags 152 Child restraints 162 Tires Wheels and Loading 181 Tire information 183 Tire inflation 186 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 198 Vehicle loading 202 Trailer towing 210 Recreational towing 216 Driving 217 Starting 217 Brakes 223 AdvanceTrac 226 Air suspension 232 Transmission operation 235 Forward and reverse sensing system 238 Rear view camera system 241 Roadside Emergencies 253 Getting roadside assistance 253 Hazard flasher control 254 Fuel pump shut off switch 255 Fuses and relays 256 Changing tires 264 Wheel lug nut torque 272 Jump starting 274 Wrecker towing 277 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide
131. The axle lubricant should be changed anytime an axle has been submerged in water Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Replace rear axle lubricant every 100 000 miles 160 000 km Rear axle lubricant change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSLM2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 mL of additive friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water E 450 and F 450 550 axle maintenance Replace rear axle lubricant every 100 000 miles 160 000 km under normal driving conditions on all E 450 and F 450 550 applications For E 450 and F 450 550 vehicles operated at or near maximum Gross Vehicle Weights the rear axle lubricant should be replaced every 50 000 miles 80 000 km In addition this 50 000 mile 80 000 km schedule should be observed when the vehicles are operated under the Special Operating Conditions California fuel filter replacement If vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this main tenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the
132. Yellow Yellow Bmw _ 8 Back Black 304 256 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located under the right hand side of the instrument panel To remove the trim panel for access to the fuse box pull the panel toward you and swing it out away from the side and remove it To reinstall it line up the tabs with the grooves on the panel then push it shut To remove the fuse box cover press in the tabs on both sides of the cover then pull the cover off To reinstall the fuse box cover place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click shut Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly e fro B gt gt 3 fro N o 7 o e C27 28 257 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The fuses are coded as follows Rating 1 304 df Driverwindow F 3 15A Audio rear seat controls Satellite radio SYNC _ Passenger window Keypad illumination 3rd row seat enable Brake shift interlock BSI Smart fuse panel logic power 6 20A PTumsignls 8 10A Low beam headlamps right 9 Interior lights PO
133. act completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function 144 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and right front passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt system at the start of a crash The safety belt pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy System When the safety belt pretensioner deploys the lap and shoulder belt are tightened When the Safety Canopy System and or the front airbags are activated the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger seating positions will be activated w
134. active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security override To override a bounce back condition within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position pull and hold the switch up and the window will travel up with no bounce back or pinch protection If the switch is released before the window is fully closed the window will stop For example this can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver and front passenger to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver and front passenger press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the audio system power windows and moon roof if equipped operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 74 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and a driver s side exterior mirror have an auto dimming function The electronic day nig
135. afety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 281 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistamce section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration Duri
136. aint until it locks into its original position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 129 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Placing the 2nd row outboard 40 seats in cargo mode WARNING Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position as the system will move forward when you lift the release handle The 2nd row seats can be placed in a kneel down load floor position to allow more cargo space WARNING Always return the seat from the kneel position prior to raising the seatback Failure to do so could result in personal injury To place the seats in the cargo mode 1 Fold down the 2nd row seat 2 Pull the cargo mode lever up to release the seat into a kneel down load floor position moderate force may be required to move the seat forward and down Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor position The seatback cannot be returned to the upright position until the seat is returned from the kneel down position To return the seat to the upright position 1 Push the seat rearward until the latch is engaged 2 Return the seat
137. ally available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 291 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with
138. amage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents Engi
139. ammed it will start the vehicle s engine and will operate the remote entry system if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter The theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming 117 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security If the key was not successfully programmed it will not start your vehicle s engine and or will not operate the remote entry features The theft indicator light may flash on and off Wait 20 seconds and you may repeat Steps 1 through 8 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key s programmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 Note To program MyKey features refer to MyKey in this chapter PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The perimeter anti theft system will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry If there is any potential perimeter anti theft problem with your vehicle ensure ALL integrated keyhead transmitters are brought to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Arming the system When armed this system will respond if unauthorized entry is attempted When unauthorized entry occurs the system will flash the turn signal lamps and will sound the horn The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the off position or is removed from the ignition Eith
140. antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the windshield 298 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance To replace the wiper blades 1 Fold back the wiper arm and 2 A position the wiper blade at right c5 Z angles to the wiper arm 7 gt SS 2 To remove press the retaining clip A to disengage the wiper 27 blade then pull the blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 3 Install the new wiper blade on the arm and press it into place until a click is heard Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing the rear window wiper blade To replace the rear wiper blade 1 Pull the wiper arm as far away from the glass as possible Do not use excessive force because it can break the wiper arm Hold it there until the next step
141. ar seats 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle e Front and rear seats Restraint of pregnant women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See figure below 142 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Safety belt locking modes safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximate
142. at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office 283 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your v
143. ate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir as this may result in leaks from the reservoir 231 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e Underinflated tire s on any wheel s e Uneven vehicle loading e High crown in center of road e High crosswinds Wheels out of alignment e Loose or worn suspension components AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM The air suspension system is designed to improve ride handling and general vehicle performance during e Certain road conditions e Steering maneuvers e Braking e Acceleration This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs If you exceed the load limit the rear air suspension may not operate The air suspension system will stay active for
144. ately after ignition is turned on e series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event SOS Post Crash Alert System The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 161 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags
145. ature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 184 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire
146. ause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear of the center console The heated seats only operate when the ignition is on To operate the heated seats e Press the indicated side of the control for maximum heat e Press again to deactivate e Press the indicated side of the control for minimum heat e Press again to deactivate The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle While the ignition is in the on position activating the high or low heated seat switch enables heating mode When activated they will turn off automatically when the engine is turned off The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been activated 135 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3rd row seats Ensure that no objects such as books purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the third row seats or on the seat cushion before lowering them Ensure that the head restraints are lowered Ensure that the sec
147. av Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jack and tools 1 Open the liftgate then locate the access panel on the floor behind the 3rd row seat Unlatch and remove the panel 2 Remove the jack and tools assembly tray from the compartment by turning the wing nut counterclockwise to relieve tension against the jack assembly tray Remove the bag from the jack and tool assembly tray by loosening the strap Note Pay close attention to the orientation of the bag because it will have to be reinstalled after changing the tire 3 Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench jack extension and handle from the plastic tray Remove the jack and instruction sheet from the tray assembly Removing the spare tire 1 Remove the jack handle and winch extension from the tray and assemble them 2 Open the spare tire winch access plug in the bottom of the compartment for the jack and tools tray 3 Insert the winch extension tool assembly through the access hole in the floor and engage the winch 4 To remove the spare tire turn the handle counterclockwise until the tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack Slide the retainer through the center of the spare tire wheel 267 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Tire change procedure WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the par
148. away from the tire wheel assembly 190 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you
149. back to the upright position 130 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Adjusting the 2nd row outboard 40 seat for E Z Entry The E Z entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the 3rd row seat To enter the 3rd row seat 1 Fold down the Znd row seat and release the handle 2 Pull the handle up again until the seat releases from the floor 3 Push the seat upward and fold it away from the third row WARNING Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop To return the seat to a seating position 1 Push the seat down and latch to the floor with a moderate amount of effort and speed 2 Make sure the seat is latched to the floor 3 Bring the seat back to an upright position The seatback should lock into position Note If the seat back will not return to the upright position tumble the seat again and re latch it to the floor Be sure that cargo or other objects are not trapped underneath the seatback 181 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Note If a squeak is heard from the latch area the latch striker pin should be wiped clean of dust or debris WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behin
150. battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 m every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion 329 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Removing vehicle from storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following e Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces e Check windshield wipers for any deterioration e Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests e Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage e Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label e Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 ft 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up e Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels e If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect If you have any concerns or issues contact your authorized dealer MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 5 4L V8 engine Air filter element F
151. because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC press the AdvanceTrac with RSC button refer to AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control RSC Stability Enhancement System in this chapter while driving in deep sand if you experience excessive engine power reduction Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even four wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 249 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving
152. brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 234 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Driving with a 6 speed automatic transmission Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the engine is turned off the shift data which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in the Powertrain Control Module PCM and Transmission Control Module TCM If the battery is disconnected for any reason the stored information from the last time the key was turned to off will be read This way no information will be lost with any battery removal or battery disconnect P Park This position locks the transmission PRND321 and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Start the engine
153. ce and Specifications peS1euiqns sey o xe y oum Aue pesueyo oq prous 3ueorqnr our T M ur peg amp reurqns uooq sey o xe oy SI 92IAIoS pojoedsns st Yee ssopun peyoeyo 03 JOU SJUKOLIQN pojeoriqni poJoprsuoo sr pue JULIANI 9 xe orouqu s qr ST SAPPA MOK ogeurep uorssruisue1 osneo fewr popuouruiooo1 y uey 19470 ping Aue JO 5 TEAU 92IAI9S 129 00 IYJ 0 40270w40fu2 BOUDUAIULDUWL 01 PI OSN Apuo prnous AT Jey suorssmusuer orpeurogny 29002 xuej ut ue YIM peddmbo 9ZIs 191005 uo poseq suoreordde eurog oyeutxoidde Auo sojeorpur UOLO dv 9u pue V OS6OZN SSM uoneogroeds pJo p Jo sjueuroJmbod 913 ATUO Aojepueur JOU ST 1070W pue q orjeuju s Jo oneuuds asf asn 01 3224100 1 107 Sut 9qe 9 n10q jue ooo ou OPA MOA ur peddmbo od quepooo PPV 18 971 suones Gee T0901 suoT es 0 95 Yue ong paepurys queg ony epeuer 7 6V 91H8IA H8A J9useA prergsputuw AG uut se lt pue q v 4 0XO 1 9
154. chors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information 170 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol o eee o Ka e The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between th
155. ck for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing and don t make full throttle starts e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades 214 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Activate the tow haul feature to eliminate excessive transmission shifting and assist in transmission cooli
156. ck to its original position The power fold down seats will operate for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is in off The transmission must be in P Park and the liftgate or liftgate glass must be open Similar to the battery saver feature the power 3rd row seat will be disabled 10 minutes after turning the vehicle off If the power 3rd row seat is disabled after 10 minutes the seat can be enabled by opening any door pressing the unlock button on the key fob pressing any keyless entry keypad button or turning the ignition key 197 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS The restraint system provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s restraint system consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front crash severity sensor e Restraints Control Module RCM e hestraint system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiri
157. cle the fuel filler door is located Battery voltage gauge Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the on position If the a pointer moves and stays outside the L E H normal operating range have the vehicle s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal L H operating range between L and H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil level is correct have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer 19 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster MESSAGE CENTER Your vehicle s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Info Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features SETUP RESET TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold the RESET button to reset Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to Englis
158. cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts Conditions of operation The driver safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position 147 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster When the Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder warning will not expire Refer to MyKey in the Locks and security chapter The Belt Minder feature uses two different warning chimes Duri
159. conomy Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal Four wheel drive operation if equipped is less fuel efficient than two wheel drive operation Close windows for high speed driving 320 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance re
160. controls By simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 buttons the rear passengers may be allowed to access FULL or LOCAL control or be LOCKED out of rear seat controls altogether After the ignition has been turned on the rear seat passengers have FULL control over the audio system This means that while in single play mode the rear seat passengers can fully control the audio system from the rear controls including volume media selection and seek adjustments Simultaneously press 3 and 5 to restrict the rear passengers control to LOCAL media While in dual play mode this means that only media which is played through the auxiliary input jacks or media which has 40 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems been selected at the radio by the driver can be accessed by the rear passengers Press 3 and 5 a second time to LOCK the rear passenger controls completely all media access is removed from the rear passengers Press 3 and 5 a third time to complete the cycle and allow full control to the rear passenger again To activate the rear seat radio controls e After the ignition has been turned on FULL rear controls are active 2 4 5 Ce and the system is in single play mode e Press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 at the same time The word LOCAL will illuminate in the radio display and on the rear display indicating that only LOCAL rear control is available Note Whi
161. cteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 189 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use
162. ctivation The driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration 154 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation
163. cury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 253 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at www ford ca for information on Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursemen
164. d If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it will be necessary to erase the current settings using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices being used To erase programming on the Car2U system individual buttons cannot be erased use the following procedure 1 Firmly press the two outside Car2U system buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights begin to blink rapidly The indicator lights are located directly above the NZ buttons 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release your fingers from the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system it is recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes and modifications to the Car2U system transmitter by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the equipment 89 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT WARNI
165. d between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury 79 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with speed control RESUME Press to resume a set speed SET Press to increase the set speed SET Press to decrease the set speed OFF ON Press to turn speed control off or on Setting speed control To set speed control 1 Press and release ON 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press and release SET or SET 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage 80 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Disengaging speed control Press the brake pedal to disengag
166. d as a MyKey The key will remain restricted until MyKey is cleared Any remaining keys are referred to as an administrator key or admin key The admin key can be used to create a MyKey program optional MyKey settings and clear the MyKey feature When the MyKey feature is enabled the user can use system check in the message center to see how many MyKeys and admin keys are programmed to the vehicle and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey active MyKey restricted features Standard settings These settings cannot be changed e The audio system will be muted whenever Belt Minder is activated until the safety belts are buckled Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt Minder operation e Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a chime when the distance to empty value reaches 75 miles 120 km e The reverse sensing system cannot be turned off Optional settings These settings can be changed e Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached 80 mph 130 km h e Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected vehicle speed of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h is exceeded e The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45 MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or if equipped navigation screen w
167. d starts the vehicle as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight keys can be IKTs with remote entry functionality If your or standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter portion of the IKT to your vehicle Note maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight can be IKTs with remote entry functionality 116 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Tips e Only use integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs or standard SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible e f two p
168. d the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Exiting the 3rd row 1 Pull the strap located at the bottom outboard of the seat back to release the seat from the floor and rotate the seat up towards the front seat 2 Follow the directions above to return the seat from the E Z entry E and to the upright position 9v 132 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Reclining the 2nd row outboard 40 seatback Locate the release handle on the outboard side of the seat cushion and lift gently to allow the seatback to be adjusted to the desired location WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Folding the 2nd row center 2096 seat system if equipped 1 Locate the release handle located in the upper left seat back and pull the handle to release the folding seat latch WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the load floor position 133 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 With the latch released the seatback can be lowered in
169. d to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal 316 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3 8L may be required e The service engine soon C indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Refilling with a portable fuel container With the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the included funnel 1 Locate the white plastic funnel It is attached to the underside of the spare
170. d up to 2596 unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell break down or become brittle and crack especially when mixed with gasoline Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers 312 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when yo
171. does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The safety canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover WARNING Several Safety Canopy System components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation MEE WARNING If the Safety Canopy System has deployed the safety canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy System including the A B C and D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the safety canopy is not replaced it will not function again which will increase the risk of injury in a future collision 160 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immedi
172. dren outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster 176 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but rema
173. e terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to the jump starting stud located in the engine compartment near the washer fluid bottle Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts 275 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Remove the jumper cable from the jump starting stud 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal o
174. e 1st Printing USA fus Driving 3 After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the key to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Cold weather starting flexible fuel vehicles only The starting characteristics of all grades of Eg ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol As the outside temperature approaches freezing ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol same as with unleaded gasoline If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions 0 F to 32 F 18 C to 0 C you may experience increased cranking times rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is cold when operating on Egs ethanol Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter damage may occur If the engine fails to start turn the key to off and wait 30 seconds before trying again Do not use starting flu
175. e To change oil life 10096 value to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press RESET to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 1096 UNITS Displays the current units English or Metric Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric AUTOLAMP SEC This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press the RESET button to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Press the RESET button to turn autolock on or off AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off Press the RESET button to turn autounlock on or off RUNNING BOARDS if equipped This feature automatically deploys the side running boards for easy entry exit from the vehicle or for cleaning Press the RESET button to select the running boards setting as follows e AUTO the running boards will automatically deploy when a door is opened and automatically retract when the door is closed e OUT the running boards will remain deployed regardless of the doors being open closed This setting can be used when washing the vehicle or accessing t
176. e display Distributes air through the instrument panel vents lt A Distributes air through the instrument panel and the floor vents Distributes air through the floor vents WE Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents and the floor vents 10 a Driver heated seat control if equipped Press to activate deactivate the driver heated seat See Climate controlled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 11 e Driver cooled seat control if equipped Press to activate deactivate the driver cooled seat See Climate controlled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 12 8 Front fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 13 OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off 51 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 14 Driver temperature control Press to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver side of the cabin Sets the passenger side temperature also when DUAL is disengaged Note The recommended vehicle cabin setting is between 72 F 22 and 75 24 15 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool
177. e than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
178. e BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines 282 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings
179. e comfort of the shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the outboard second row seats To adjust the comfort guide 1 Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide The portion of the belt between the latch tongue and the D ring not the portion where the belt exits from the quarter trim panel 2 Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is centered on the occupant s shoulder WARNING Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision 146 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument
180. e cushion and seatback below the locator symbols on the seat back Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments 7 The locator symbols round plastic buttons for the center seat and on rectangular tags for the outboard seats Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown 171 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached fir
181. e door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 84 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security reasons Refer to Erasing the Car2U9 Home Automation System buttons later in this section Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Car2U system Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist you in programming the transmitter Additional Car2U9 system information can be found on line at www learcar2U com or by calling the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 572 2728 Types of garage door openers rolling code and fixed code The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate rolling code and fixed code garage door openers e Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used e Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time It is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code If you do not know if your garage door opener is a ro
182. e equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC Your vehicle is equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation System supplement if equipped 47 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CLIMATE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 1 947 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield 2 Rear temperature control Press to enable the auxiliary system and set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature with the front control The rear cabin airflow temperature will match the driver airflow temperature setting when only the center rear temperature bar is illuminated The rear cabin airflow temperature will be warmer or cooler than the driver airflow temperature setting when more than one rear temperature bar is illuminated When the rear temperature button is pressed the display will show only the rear cabin settings After the rear setting changes are completed on the front control the display will automatically show all climate settings 3 Passenger temperature control Press to increa
183. e normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If the vehicle doesn t start try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily the vehicle will not start contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service 115 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position The theft indicator will flash every two seconds to act as a theft F3 deterrent when the vehicle is A armed Automatic disarming The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the on position The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Replacement of integrated keyhead transmitters IKT and coded keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks an
184. e of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion USB port WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handhe
185. e s wheel house and or body e Do not install chains on the front wheels as this may interfere with suspension components e Chains are not recommended for use on the P275 55R20 tire e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire chains on your vehicle e Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle e Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will 202 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight
186. e the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions 217 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the
187. e the speed control Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RESUME This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control To set a higher speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press and release SET to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and release SET 4 Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press and release SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased 81 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS Radio control features VOL Volume Press to decrease or increase the volume lt lt PP Seek Press to select the previous next radio station preset CD track or satell
188. e to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible 310 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS gj Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or dea
189. eating position WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle WARNING Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury 153 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause a
190. eck and lubricate door rubber weatherstrips inspect for excessive wear Check and clean body and door drain holes Inspect for clogs and obstructions 6606660000 Multi point inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps running great Multi point inspection Recommended at every visit Check and top up fluid levels brake coolant recovery reservoir manual and automatic transmission if equipped with an underhood dipstick power steering if equipped and window washer Inspect tires for wear and check air pressure including spare Check exhaust system for leaks damage loose parts and foreign material Check battery performance Check operation of horn exterior lamps turn signals and hazard warning lights Check radiator coolers heater and air conditioning hoses Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation Check windshield for cracks chips and pitting Inspect for oil and fluid leaks Inspect engine air filter Inspect half shaft dust boots if equipped Check shocks and struts and other suspension components for leaks and damage Inspect steering and linkage Inspect accessory drive belt s Inspect clutch
191. ectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 37 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volum
192. ed Service information and supporting specifications are provided in this owner s guide Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service advice The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered by warranties so you may be charged for labor parts or lubricants used Maximum oil change interval 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine coolant change interval Initial change 6 years or 105 000 miles 168 000 km whichever comes first After initial change every 3 years or 45 000 miles 72 000 km Check every month Check function of all interior and exterior lights C Check tires for wear and correct air pressure including spare tire Check windshield washer fluid level Check engine oil level 346 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Check every six months Check lap shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function Check parking brake for proper operation Check safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation Check cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Check battery connections and clean if necessary Check washer spray wiper operation and clean all wiper blades replace as necessary Check and lubricate all hinges latches and outside locks Inspect for correct operation Ch
193. ed Turn to select the desired fan speed 2 Temperature mode selection ed The distribution of air from the overhead and floor registers is based on the temperature selected Turn 4 to select for comfort Q To use the rear climate controls ensure that REAR is pressed on the main climate control face 53 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to clear the rear window of gt LN fog and thin ice The engine must be running to operate the rear window defroster Press the control to turn the rear window defroster on An indicator light on the button will illuminate when active The rear window defroster turns off automatically after 15 minutes or when the ignition is turned off To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any time press the control again Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty 54 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus HEADLAMP CONTROL Rotate the headlamp control to the first position PX to turn on the parking lamps Rotate to the second position 20 to turn on the headlamps Rotate back to O to turn the headlamps off Auto
194. ed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Note The Control Trac selector switch should not be changed while the rear wheels are slipping Shifting between Control Trac system modes Press any button 4X2 4X4 AUTO or 4X4 at any forward speed The message center may display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the system shift The message center will then display 4X4 AUTO if 4X4 AUTO is selected or 4X4 if 4X4 is selected The message center will momentarily display 4X2 if 4X2 is selected Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles Four wheel drive vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the road The AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement system can be turned off manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC button refer to AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control RSC Stability Enhancement System in this chapter while operating in 4X2 4X4 AUTO or 4X4 while driving in deep sand very deep snow or more strenuous off road maneuvers This will disable the engine management feature allowing the vehicle to maintain full power and enhanced m
195. ed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Deactivating activating autolock Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled There are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e Performing the power door lock control procedure e Performing the keyless entry keypad if equipped procedure or e Performing the message center if equipped procedure Before following the activation or deactivation procedures make sure that the anti theft system is not armed ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate window are closed Power door unlock lock procedure You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait 30 seconds Note doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the configuration process 1 Turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp 6 Press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated
196. eels and Loading e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUVs and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it 183 2011 Navigator nav Owners
197. ehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur 277 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 278 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty
198. ehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS amp GLOBAL INITIATIVES 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 8 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 For customers in Guam the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands CNMI America Samoa and the U S Virgin Islands please feel free to call our Toll Free Number 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Relationship Center Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1957 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com www ford com pr 284 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates
199. either reprogram them yourself or take all IKTs to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs To program a new integrated keyhead transmitter yourself refer to Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section of this chapter Note At least two IKTs are required to perform this procedure yourself 111 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Illuminated entry The interior lamps parking lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when the integrated keyhead transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is used to unlock the door s The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if e the ignition is turned to the on position or e the integrated keyhead transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad or e after 25 seconds of illumination The inside will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open Illuminated exit e When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the ignition the interior dome lamps parking lamps and the puddle lamps Gf equipped will illuminate The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse or e the key is inserted in the ignition Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the lamps 10 minutes after the igni
200. elease RESET in order to start the timer 21 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets System check and vehicle feature customization Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through the following features i RESET RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK When this message appears press the RESET button and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present OIL LIFE CHARGING SYSTEM WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOOR STATUS LIFTGATE GLASS BRAKE SYSTEM TIRE PRESSURE AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM FUEL LEVEL 10 MYKEY MILES if programmed 11 MYKEY S PROGRAMMED 12 ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED OIL LIFE This displays the remaining oil life 00 10 WHY An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 10096 after each oil change perform the following 1 Press and release SETUP to display OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW 22 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 2 Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life to 10096 Not
201. enable the control located in the rear of the floor console Press again to turn the auxiliary system off When the REAR button is pressed the display will show only the rear cabin settings After the rear setting changes are completed on the front control the display will automatically show all climate settings Dual automatic temperature control with heated and cooled seats and rear passenger compartment climate control if equipped 7 9 2 yS Mio rr PEPEE 1 Qt Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield 2 Rear temperature control Press to enable the auxiliary system and set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature with the front control The rear cabin airflow temperature will match the driver airflow temperature setting when only the center rear temperature bar is illuminated The rear cabin airflow temperature will be warmer or cooler than the driver airflow temperature setting when more than one rear temperature bar is illuminated When the rear temperature button is pressed the display will show only the rear cabin settings After the rear setting changes are completed on the front control the display will automatically show all climate settings 0 9 3 Passenger temperature control Press to increase decrease the temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle 4 Ff
202. ended Service Plan that is right for you NOTE Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford ESP coverage This information is subject to change 343 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why maintain your vehicle This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your vehicle Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering specifications Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in this guide Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has factory trained technicians who can perform the required maintenance using genuine Ford parts They are committed to meeting your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction Protecting your investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To ensure the proper perfor
203. ent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer Or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or s
204. entry transmitter and instrument panel button when the power liftgate is turned off in the message center Liftgate ajar signal If the liftgate or liftgate glass are not fully latched you will receive a message on the instrument panel If you see this message check both the liftgate glass and liftgate door to ensure they are fully latched WARNING Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle Liftgate window To open the liftgate window press the button in the center of the liftgate above the license plate 94 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The cargo management system consists of a storage compartment located in the floor of the rear cargo area 1 To open lift up on the handle and cover 2 To close lower the cover and press down on the handle until the latch clicks Cargo shelf divider if equipped The cargo shelf divider is located behind the rear seat of your vehicle The shelf has two positions Flat shelf which pivots up and snaps into place or a divider which pivots up and snaps vertically into place Do not put more than 30 Ib 14 kg on the shelf To move the shelf to the shelf position pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels on the side trim pa
205. er belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained 167 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Perform the following steps when installing
206. er of the following actions will prearm the alarm system e Press the A control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your integrated keyhead transmitter When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors the hood and the liftgate are closed If any of these are not closed the horn will chirp twice to warn you that a door the hood or the liftgate is still open e Press the driver or passenger interior door lock control while the door is open then close the door 118 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Press the 7 e8and9 e 0 controls on the keyless entry pad at the same time to lock the 8 2 5 6 7 8 6 9 doors driver s door must be closed There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur before the vehicle becomes armed Each door the hood and the liftgate is armed individually and if any are open they must be closed before the open entry point door hood or liftgate can enter the 20 second countdown The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors the hood and the liftgate are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second countdown Disarming the system You can disarm the system by any of the following actions e Unlock the doors by using the remote entry
207. er seats If your backless booster seat has removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 178 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this
208. ers Guide 1st Printing USA fus Small children Larger children Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Recommended EE Child size height weight or age restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less generally age four or younger Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib 36 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child restraint manufacturer Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Use a belt positioning booster seat Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft
209. es a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine 309 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature e The engine will completely shut down e Steering and braking effort will increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicl
210. es and rear of the vehicle Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror When shifting out of R Reverse and into any other gear the image in the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen After shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is pressed Note The default setting for the camera delay is off Press the Settings button found on the navigation screen if equipped to set the camera delay feature to on or off When towing the camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the camera is located on the liftgate above the license plate Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the reverse camera system WARNING The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
211. es to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it is necessary to erase the current settings using the Erasing the Car2U9 Home Automation System buttons procedure and then programming all of the devices being used Fixed code programming Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter 1 To program units with fixed code DIP switches you will need the garage door hand held transmitter paper and a pen or pencil 2 Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches Use the figure below When a switch is in the up on or position circle L When a switch is in the middle neutral or 0 position circle When a switch is in the down off or position circle R 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CTS 206 12 T124 8 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls M MM OE Down offr R R R R R R R R R L left M middle R right 3 To input these positions into the Car2U system simultaneously press all three Car2U system buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into programming mode The indicator lights will blink slowly Within 2 5 minutes enter your corresponding
212. f the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly NO TEXT Song title information Song title information not available not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 46 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required NO TEXT Category information Category information not available not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location the SIRIUS satellite that is blocking the or SIRIUS tower to SIRIUS signal 1 the vehicle antenna tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return UPDATING Update of channel No action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes CALL SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS Satellite re activate or resolve Radio subscription issues NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may b
213. f the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive 4 terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 276 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure Also wrecker towing the vehicle by the front frame mounted tow hooks is not recommended or advised Note The air suspension control and the ignition must be turned off before being towed Refer to Air suspension in the Driving chapter On 4 2 vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without dollies and the rear wheels off the ground On 4x4 vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground If the v
214. f the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Your service brakes are self adjusting Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for scheduled maintenance Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle s brake system In normal operation automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning however they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold heat moisture road dust salt or mud If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present while braking the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter for information B RAKE WARNING If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply your brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective 223 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Anti lock brake system ABS On ABS equipped vehicles a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic condi
215. faces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 195 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are s 3 described below ero Wir Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on ligh
216. facturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
217. fob 3 Follow Steps 1 4 in the Create a MyKey section Note For all vehicles the number of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in the total count See the Check MyKey system status section 100 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note For all vehicles with remote start installed it is possible to program all original vehicle keys as MyKeys in which case you will need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys as admin keys by doing the following Enter the vehicle close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob 3 Follow Steps 1 4 in the Clear MyKey section Troubleshooting Potential Causes Can t create a MyKey e Key in the ignition is already a MyKey e Key in the ignition is the last remaining admin key there always has to be at least one admin key e SecuriLock passive anti theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Cannot program the MyKey e Key in the ignition is a MyKey optional settings e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is
218. four wheel drive 4X4 operation in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Control trac fowr wheel drive 4X4 operation in the Driving chapter 28 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed at startup when MyKey is in use Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey in the Locks amd Security chapter for more information VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is ap
219. four wheel drive mode is selected the Control Trac system uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On four wheel drive vehicles the transfer case allows you to select four wheel drive when necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in this chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle 248 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Normal characteristics On some four wheel drive models the initial shift from two wheel drive to four wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and engaging the front wheels and is not cause for concern Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Note If air is released from your tires the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS indicator light may illuminate Avoid excessive speed
220. fuel as normal 4 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within the fuel filler housing and to the ground If the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message comes on the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed The inlet may have Stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing At the next opportunity safely pull off the road turn off the engine open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel see Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off f
221. g e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 340 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings S Spark plugs Cexcept e Shock absorbers California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 1096 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportu
222. gage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 339 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS U S ONLY More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is
223. h XX F XX C This displays the outside air temperature Press and hold INFO for two seconds to display the outside temperature To switch from a blank display to the temperature display hold INFO for two seconds until the temperature is seen in the display To switch the temperature display to compass display hold INFO until the compass heading is seen in the display MYKEY MILES km if programmed For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty 20 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVG MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gall
224. h as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC 37 A B D or F in Canada available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cl
225. h their headphones 41 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To deactivate dual play mode e Press the 2 and 4 buttons simultaneously again e Press the headphone speaker button again e Press the 3 and 5 buttons simultaneously until the rear seat controls are LOCKED Using any of these methods the headphone icon will turn off in both displays front and rear the rear speaker sound will be restored and the headphone jacks will be disabled Using headphones dual play mode WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves Plug a 3 5 mm headphone not included into the jack Press the speaker button or the 2 4 preset buttons simultaneously on the radio to activate the headphones The words DUAL PLAY will illuminate on the radio display sound will no longer be heard from the rear speakers and the fade control will be disabled signaling that Dual Play has been activated The front speakers remain playing for the front passengers Press the speaker button or the 2 4 preset buttons simultaneously on the radio again to deactivate the headphones and dual play mode The words SINGLE PLAY will iluminate on the radio display and fade control and sound from rear speakers will be restored signali
226. hannels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 songs If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE Y
227. he following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on e series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided 140 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is no
228. he middle position iS the instrument panel dimmer um switch is rotated until the courtesy lamps come on any of the remote entry controls are pressed and ignition is off and switch is in the middle position With the ignition key in the accessory or on position the rear dome lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control 59 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps and interior lamps except the hazard warning lamps if activated 10 minutes after the ignition control has been turned off The system will not turn off the parking lamps if they are on BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 5096 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak a
229. he power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature If the power liftgate is closing the system is designed to reverse to full open when it encounters a solid obstacle A three second chime is also sounded when an obstacle is detected Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can be closed under power If the power liftgate is opening the system is designed to stop when it encounters a solid obstacle A chime will sound for three seconds while the obstacle is present Resetting the power liftgate The power liftgate may not operate under these conditions If any of these conditions occur the power liftgate must be reset e A low voltage or dead battery e Disconnected battery e The liftgate is manually closed and left ajar unlatched 93 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate 3 Power open the liftgate by using the remote entry transmitter or instrument panel button Note If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The system will need to be turned on to resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The power liftgate is still operational through the use of the remote
230. he readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system Ae WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback 156 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system w
231. he roof rack The running boards will stow and enter AUTO mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h e OFF the running boards will remain IN regardless of the doors being open closed 23 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster POWER LIFTGATE This feature allows users to open close the rear liftgate at the touch of a button Press the RESET button to turn the power liftgate on or off If disabled the outside release handle and the rear cargo area control button are off The instrument panel button will continue to function the liftgate in power mode EASY ENTRY This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit entry from the vehicle Press the RESET button to turn the easy entry exit seat on or off AIR SUSPENSION Before disabling the air suspension make sure the liftgate and liftgate glass are in the closed position With the vehicle in P Park press RESET to turn the air suspension off or on REAR PARK AID This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected To disable enable rear park aid press RESET when reaching this menu from the setup sequence or put the vehicle in R Reverse and press RESET FRONT PARK AID This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the front bumper To disable enable front park aid press RE
232. he tire when the tread is worn T down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced 188 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental chara
233. hen attempting to exceed the limited volume e The AdvanceTrac system cannot be turned off When this optional setting is on the MyKey user will not be able to deactivate the system Note It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac system if the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand Create a MyKey To program MyKey on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle insert the key that you want to make a MyKey M into the ignition Turn the ignition on Use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY will be displayed 98 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS AS RESTRICTED is displayed 4 Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed MyKey is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys Note To program the optional settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey optional settings section If your vehicle is equipped with remote start see the Using MyKey with remote start systems section Note The MyKey can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was created otherwise a standard key administrator key is required to clear the MyKey programming To clear all MyKeys go to Step 2 in the Clear MyKey
234. hen the respective seatbelt is properly buckled WARNING The driver and the right front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags or Safety Canopy System and safety belt pretensioners Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter Safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and right front passenger Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To lower the shoulder belt height squeeze the side release buttons with your thumb and finger and slide the height adjuster down To raise the height of the shoulder belt squeeze the side release buttons and slide the height adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place 145 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Second row comfort guide The second row outboard lap shoulder belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide This guide is attached to the quarter trim panel and is used to adjust th
235. hicle from the wheel being 3 changed If on a grade block both 2 wheels on the downward side of the Qr hill Q 2 Turn off the air suspension system The air suspension system is controlled through the message center Refer to Air suspension system in the Driving section for more information Also turn off the deployable running boards if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster section 3 Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations 4 Use the tip of the jack handle to remove any wheel trim Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground Position the jack according to the jack locator arrows found on the frame and turn the jack handle and extension tool assembly clockwise Note Use the frame rail as the jacking point NOT the control arm 6 Lift the vehicle so the tire is no further than 1 inch 2 5 cm off the ground when installing the spare tire 269 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the block the wheels both front or both rear on the o
236. hicle or you can program the IKTs yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key 114 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT but may cause momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster e When the ignition is in the off A position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicat
237. hicle performance be sure to use the proper equipment while towing Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing e Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles 800 km Additionally during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 70 mph 113 km h and do not make starts at full throttle e Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer e Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications e Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter e Stay within your vehicle s load limits If exceeded cargo should be removed from the trailer and or the vehicle until all weights are within specified limits e Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing Refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter Trailer towing standard equipment Your vehicle is equipped with a integrated trailer hitch and a Class I 4 pin trailer electrical connector The 4 pin connector supplies power to tail lamps stop lamps and turn lamps See the trailer towing chart for the trailer towing weight recommendations Trailer towing optionally equipped trailer tow package The optional trailer tow package includes heavy duty trailer to
238. ht mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the interior mirror When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle the interior rear view mirror and the driver s side exterior mirror will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Note A rear center passenger and or raised rear center headrest if equipped may also block the light from reaching the sensor Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Note If equipped with a rearview camera system a video image will display in the mirror or the navigation system display if equipped when the vehicle is put in R Reverse As you shift into any other gear from R Reverse the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter 75 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors i WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the contr
239. id such as ether in the air intake system Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury If you should experience cold weather starting problems on Egs ethanol and neither an alternative brand of Kg ethanol nor an engine block heater is available the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance Your vehicle is designed to operate on Egs ethanol alone unleaded gasoline alone or any mixture of the two See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on ethanol If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions flexible fuel vehicles only 1 Press and hold down the accelerator 1 3 to 1 2 way to floor then crank the engine 2 When the engine starts release the key then gradually release the accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up If the engine still fails to start repeat Step 1 220 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm o
240. id unintended damage to the roof panel 96 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS Your vehicle may be equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters IKTs The key blade functions as a programmed key which starts the vehicle and unlocks locks all the doors The transmitter portion functions as the remote entry transmitter 7 Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle using non programmed key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your authorized dealer supplied IKTs replacement IKTs are available through your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section later in this chapter Note Your vehicle s IKTs were issued with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cu XXX E Re information It is recommended ni 558 you keep the tag in safe place for 28 future reference 97 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security MYKEY The MyKey feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activate
241. ide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although a four wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake forcefully and steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 251 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Maintenance and modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and
242. iles 48 000 km Every 37 500 miles Inspect valve clearances adjust as necessary Every 60 000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on 96 000 km 5 speed TorqShift transmission consult dealer for requirements Replace front wheel bearing grease grease seal if Every 105 000 miles 168 000 km Every 150 000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter 240 000 km except 5 speed TorqShift9 transmission filter not required on 6F35 6F50 DPS6 and AWF 21 transmissions consult dealer for requirements within the last 100 000 miles 160 000 km non sealed bearings are used 2WD vehicles 45 000 miles 72 000 km or 36 months thereafter Perform a follow up inspection at 120 000 miles 192 000 km 351 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Maintenance schedule log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 352 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDAT
243. in gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 1096 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 1596 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph
244. inactivity e pressing the C control on the remote entry transmitter e or the ignition position changes Unlocking and locking the doors and liftgate using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate To unlock all doors and liftgate press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds of entering the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code To lock all doors and liftgate press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time Note The driver s door must be closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first To open the liftgate glass press the 5 e 6 after entering the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded integrated keyhead transmitter IKT programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded integrated keyhead transmitters additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your ve
245. indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 197 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as pos
246. ing USA fus Cleaning LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution e Clean spills as quickly as possible e Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather e Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioni
247. ing light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again 151 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a
248. ining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 177 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless boost
249. ion mirror is extended down 69 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Power quarter rear windows Press and hold the VENT portion of the control to open the power rear uarter windows gt 8 Pull and hold the VENT control to close the power rear quarter windows Note Vehicles without a moon roof will only have the VENT button WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power rear quarter windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power rear quarter windows you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window opening CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Utility compartment coin holder slots tissue box holder audio input jack and USB port if equipped 3 Power point rear climate controls rear audio controls if equipped rear heated seat controls if equipped and 110V AC power point if equipped 4 Rear cupholders 5 Side storage WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision 70 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CLOCK Press the right control to move the time d
250. ious channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press SEEK to seek to the previous channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK to fast seek through the previous channels In TEXT MODE press E SEEK to view the previous display text when lt is active in the display Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 35 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 12 SHUFFLE Press to play all tracks on the current disc in random order 13 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 14 CD Press to enter CD mode If CD is already loaded into the system CD play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 15 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 satellite radio mode FES DVD DVD mode if equipped SYNC or LINE IN auxiliary audio mode Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 16 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 17 CD slot Insert a CD label side up 18 LOAD Press to load a CD Press LOAD a
251. isplay forwards Press the left control to move the time display backwards AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12V DC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e By the passenger s ankle near the floor in the front console bin e On the rear of the center console accessible from the rear seats e On the right rear quarter panel accessible from the liftgate Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehic
252. ission fluid Change rear axle lubricant E450 and F 450 550 only Change transfer case fluid 4WD vehicles Exclusive use of E85 Flex Fuel Vehicles only Every oil change 358 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus f ran exclusively on E85 fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel Special operating condition log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace 360 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiL
253. ite radio station preset depending on which media mode you are in MEDIA Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes SYNC system hands free control features Press m briefly to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold T to exit voice command Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press VOL or to adjust volume Press and hold to end a call or exit phone mode Press l to scroll through various menus and selections Press OK to confirm your selection For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement 82 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press Tn control briefly until the voice icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press VOL or to adjust volume Press and hold f to exit phone mode or end a call For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED The moon roof control is located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves The moon roof is eq
254. ity vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your owner s guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS 4WD and AWD systems if equipped A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 181 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary Information on transfer case operation
255. ized dealer FFV engines If you experience starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of E85 fuel If the driveability problems continue fill the vehicle with regular unleaded gasoline and drive vehicle normally until gasoline is used See your authorized dealer if the problem persists Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may nee
256. king brake is set then block the wheels both front or both rear on the opposite end of the vehicle from the wheel being changed If on a grade block both opposite wheels on the downward side of the hill WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn off the air suspension system prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle WARNING Turn off the running boards if equipped before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack and changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked If your vehicle is equipped with air suspension refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for instructions on turning the air suspension system off Refer to the instruction sheet located in the rear floor compartment behind the 3rd row seat with the jack tray tools assembly kit for detailed tire change instructions 268 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 1 Block the wheels both front or both rear on the opposite end of the ve
257. km h The rear sensors will only be active when the gearshift is in R Reverse The front sensors cover an area up to 27 6 inches 70 cm from the front of the vehicle and about 6 9 in 15 23 cm to the side of the front end of the vehicle See the illustration for approximate sensor area coverage 238 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The reverse sensing portion of the system detects obstacles up to 6 ft 2 m from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate 2 Zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the system detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a rear detection warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the forward and reverse sensing system as contained in this section Sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a
258. l wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 307 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine co
259. lamp control The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds or if equipped with a message center you can select a delay from 0 180 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off See Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise e To turn autolamps off rotate the control to the off position Fog lamp control The headlamp control also operates the fog lamps The fog lamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is in the PS ZO or X amp positions and the high beams are not turned on Pull the headlamp control towards you to turn the fog lamps on The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate 55 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever toward you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the fog lamps on at full intensity output To activate e the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control must be in the off parking lamps or autolamp position WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclemen
260. lar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 264 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare
261. ld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 38 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle is equipped with a USB port inside your center console This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and also to charge devices if they support this feature For further information on this feature refer to Accessing and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation System supplement LINE IN Rear seat controls if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat radio controls This feature allows front and middle seat passengers to listen to different media sources radio CD SYNC or DVD simultaneously however the front and middle seat passengers cannot listen to two different radio stations at the same time 1 MEDIA Push repeatedly to cycle through available playing medias such as AM FM1 FM2 CD SAT1 SAT2 SATS satellite radio if equipped DVD if equipped and SYNC if equipped If in Dual Play mode Oz 2 SHARED illuminates in the radio display when the front and rear modes are set to the same media Note After pressing the media button to select SYNC mode press or to scroll through the different SYNC options SYNC USB SYNC BTST and SYNC LINE For more information on SYNC operation see your SYNC supplement
262. le in single play mode LOCAL is the same as LOCKED In dual play mode LOCAL allows control of media which the driver has selected at the radio or over media played through the rear auxiliary input jacks e Press the 3 and 5 buttons a second time and the rear control will be LOCKD locked In this state the rear passenger is restricted from control over media of any kind the rear controls are disabled Note If in dual play mode the headphone icon normally illuminated in the radio display when in dual play will turn off in the radio display e Press the 3 and 5 buttons a third time and full control will be restored to the rear seat controls Turning the ignition off and then on again will have the same effect To activate dual play mode rear seat passengers listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers e Press the speaker headphone control A head phone icon af will illuminate in the radio display and in the rear display indicating the rear seat speakers have been disabled and headphones are now active This is dual play mode e Press the MEDIA Control to change audio sources for headphone mode only e Use the other controls to make adjustments to the playing media e Dual Play mode may also be activated by simultaneously Ct 2 C 5 s pressing memory presets 2 and 4 located on the radio The rear speakers are muted and rear seat passengers can listen to the selected media throug
263. le is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used 71 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Power point 110V AC if equipped The 110V AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150W Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection Note The 110V AC power point is equipped with a safety cap and a safety twist tab They both provide AC 110V protection from inserting any object 150W into the power point other than the 110V AC electrical device plug The safety cap should always be in a closed position whenever the power point outlet is not in use The 110V AC power point is located on the back of the center console The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances they may not work properly e Cathode ray tube type televisions e Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc e Measuring devices which process precise data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc e Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension co
264. lear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour 222 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of power per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs o
265. lity vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK FLOOR SHIFT TRANSMISSION This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 233 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving
266. lling code or fixed code device open your garage door opener s remote control battery cover If a panel of DIP switches is present your garage door opener is a fixed code device If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device Rolling code programming Note Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so you will know which actions are time sensitive If you do not follow the time sensitive actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage 85 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter 1 Firmly press the two outer Car2U system buttons for 1 2 seconds then release Q NZ 2 Go to the garage to locate the garage door opener motor and its learn button You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the unit s cover or light lens to locate the learn button Press the learn button after which you will have 10 30 seconds to return to your vehicle and complete the following steps If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the Owner s Guide of your garage door opener or call the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 27
267. ls or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance In fact Ford Motor Company recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Ford for a particular application Oil fluids and flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury Dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Genuine Ford parts and service When planning your maintenance services consider your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your vehicle s needs Get the most from your service and maintenance visits There are a lot of reasons why visiting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday
268. lt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature if equipped Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder cannot be disabled Also if the Belt Minder has been previously disabled it will be re enabled after the use of MyKey Refer to MyKey in the Locks and security chapter The driver Belt Minder feature can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition switch is in the off position e The driver and passenger safety belts are unbuckled 150 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warn
269. ly 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter 143 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retr
270. m Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 294 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work
271. mance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That s why it s important to rely upon your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts Parts other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured 344 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability It is the owner s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information Non Ford approved chemica
272. me typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was travelling and e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access even
273. member that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision 166 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and should
274. miles of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 4596 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see 149 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety be
275. moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your restraint system to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your restraint system to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your restraint system to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Refer to Safety restraints section in this chapter Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side
276. n system if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for instructions on turning the air suspension system on Stowing the spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground near the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem side facing up 271 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center If equipped you may have to remove the wheel center cap prior to pushing the retainer through the center of the wheel To remove the center cap press it off with the jack tool from the inner side of the wheel After doing so pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Assemble the jack handle and winch extension as shown in illustration then insert the winch extension through the access hole behind the 3rd row seat and engage the winch 4 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The wrench will become harder to turn and the spare tire winch will ratchet or slip when the tire is raised to maximum tightness A clicking sound will be heard from the winch indicating that the tire is properly stowed 5 Disassemble the jack tool and winch extension and snap them back into the tool tray Reinstall the jack bag properly around the jack and tool assembly tray making sure the strap is securely fastened
277. n term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle For information on extended subscription terms the online media player and other SIRIUS features please contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in satellite radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and preset 1 control simultaneously 45 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel I
278. n activated A 14 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Engine oil pressure RTT Displays when the oil pressure falls below the normal range Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature RTT Displays when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let it cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance amd Specifications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Low fuel RTT if equipped Displays when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Low tire pressure warning Low washer fluid RTT if equipped Displays when the windshield washer fluid is low C 15 2011 Navigator na
279. n could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ib 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry y
280. n irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Rear wheel drive RWD vehicles Four wheel drive 4WD vehicles front tires at top of diagram AAA ANNA 7700222777 AAW WY AREER REN AAA KW 472g kaa KARR KANNAN 1 X Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires KE AA SAN Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements 192 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This
281. nance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the ve
282. nd a memory preset to load to a specific slot Press and hold to autoload up to six CD The last disc loaded will begin to play Auxiliary input jack Line in WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 36 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle is equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ located inside the center console The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio Features chapter of your Navigation System supplement LINE IN Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm conn
283. ne e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running 328 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 30 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add Motorcraft Gas Stabilizer or equivalent meeting Ford material specification ESE M99C112 A to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If
284. nels and snap the shelf ends in the channels To move the shelf to the divider position pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels on the side trim panels and snap vertically in place 95 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not load any objects on the shelf that may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the case of a sudden stop or collision WARNING Do not place people or pets on or under the parcel shelf LUGGAGE RACK Your vehicle is equipped with a roof rack for transporting items on the exterior of the vehicle The maximum recommended load to be carried on the roof rack is 200 Ib 90 kg evenly distributed The cross bars can be adjusted by using the thumbwheels at each end Use the tie down loops on the thumbwheels to secure load To adjust the position of the cross bar if equipped 1 Loosen the thumbwheel at both ends of the cross bar both cross bars are adjustable 2 Slide the cross bar to the desired location 3 Firmly retighten the thumbwheels at each end of the cross bar Be sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time load is added or removed from the roof rack and periodically while traveling Always ensure that the load is secure before traveling Ford Motor Company recommends loading the roof rack only when equipped with optional crossbars to avo
285. ng For additional information refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached anticipate stops and brake gradually If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience AdvanceTrac with RSC activations during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer this is normal Cornering at a slower speed while towing will reduce the tendency of the AdvanceTrac stability enhancement system to activate Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective e If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditio
286. ng Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist o OQ Q ddp DFO e re 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Windows Front Rear Child Safety Door Lock Unlock Panic Alarm Engine Coolant Do Not Open When Hot Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Explosive Gas Power Steering Fluid Service Engine Soon Passenger Compartment e e Air Filter Check Fuel Cap 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus LES DOPO Power Window Lockout Interior Luggage Compartment Release Engine Oil Engine Coolant Temperature Battery Battery Acid Fan Warning Maintain Correct Fluid Level Engine Air Filter Jack Low Tire Pressure Warning m C8 8 gt LH 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES ex RE EY mon c co LINCOLN Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information QV N 3 4
287. ng for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor and indicator lights How does the restraint system work The restraint system can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the restraint system determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration 138 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common
288. ng mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt th
289. ng section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the website at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section e Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth 293 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custo
290. ng that dual play mode has been deactivated To use any rear controls whether in single or dual play mode the rear seat controls must be active To enable dual play the rear seat controls must be active and A illuminated in the radio display See To activate the rear seat radio controls previously 42 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e nspect discs before playing e Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out 43 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus E
291. ng the first minute of activation the warning chime will sound once every second The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second while the system is activated The driver s safety belt is not The Belt Minder feature is activated buckled approximately five the safety belt warning light seconds after the safety belt illuminates and the warning chime warning light has turned off sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until safety belt is buckled The driver s safety belt is The Belt Minder feature will not buckled while the safety belt activate indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The Belt Minder feature will not buckled before the ignition activate switch is turned to the on position The purpose of the Belt Minder is to remind occasional wearers to wear safety belts all of the time 148 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
292. nings Press and pull the switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent SS and hold the switch to open AUTO AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear window buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise this noise can be alleviated by e lowering a front window approximately two to three inches or e opening 3rd row power quarter glass for vehicles equipped with this option 73 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls One touch up or down front windows only This feature allows the driver or passenger s window to open or close fully without holding the control down To operate one touch down press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation To operate one touch up pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Bounce back front windows only When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the window is moving upward the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned off without accessory delay being
293. nity 341 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan DHVIN 3 912 3115 ALIO ON LdV Ssdudav LNIHd SSV31d 66 8908t 208 xog Od 453 P4043 01 SIU pue uoneuuojur eui ujee oL idS3 P404 puipy JO 2 BUINUAY 342 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Navigator nav USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Depending on the plan you purchase Ford ESP provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford ESP you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Ext
294. ns at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels 215 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e Causing internal damage to the components e Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless
295. nsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window controls radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 30 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems THX Your vehicle is equipped with the THX II certified premium audio system This system creates optimal acoustic quality for all seating positions and road conditions The system offers an advanced speaker system amplifier subwoofer and equalization 1 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns PRESET SAVED will appear in the display You may store up to 18 stations six presets in AM and FM2 In satellite radio mode there are 18 available presets six each for SATI SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 4 Eject Press to eject the current CD To eject a specific CD
296. nt caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 303 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6
297. ntarily display 4x2 when this mode is selected This is appropriate for normal on road driving on dry pavement and provides best fuel economy e 4X4 AUTO provides electronic control four wheel drive with power delivered to all four wheels as required for increased traction The message center will display 4X4 AUTO when this position is selected This mode is acceptable for all on road driving but recommended when wet pavement snow or loose gravel conditions are expected e 4X4 provides electronically locked four wheel drive power to front and rear wheels The message center will display 4X4 when this position is selected This position is not recommended for use on dry pavement This position is only intended for severe winter or off road conditions such as deep snow ice or shallow sand 244 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note The AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement system can be turned off manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC button refer to AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control M RSC Stability Enhancement System in this chapter while operating in 2H 4A or 4H while driving in deep sand very deep snow or more strenuous off road maneuvers This will disable the engine management feature allowing the vehicle to maintain full power and enhanced momentum through the obstacle WARNING Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not design
298. ntertainment Systems Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 2 CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician Satellite radio information Satellite radio channels SIRIUS9 broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 44 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
299. nting USA fus Instrument Cluster PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed LIFTGATE GLASS AJAR Displayed when the liftgate or liftgate glass is not completely closed CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage when the engine is running If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible If the warning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating at normal speeds contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance Specifications chapter TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low
300. ntrol events the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash momentarily The cluster message center will also display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED In some cases when trailer sway is detected the vehicle speed is too high and may be above a speed at which trailer sway will not grow continuously This may cause the system to activate multiple times causing a gradual reduction in speed Note The trailer sway control will only activate at speeds greater than 40 mph 64 km h Disabling trailer sway control Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle See Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note that regardless of chosen enable state trailer sway control will be re enabled at each new key cycle WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental e g hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with power steering Power steering uses energy from the engine to decrease the driver s effort in steering the vehicle To help prevent damage to the power steering pump e Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not oper
301. objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 187 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on t
302. ol clockwise to m adjust the right mirror and rotate K Na the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Memory feature The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door Refer to Seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Automatic dimming feature The driver s side view mirror has an auto dimming function For more information refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in this chapter Powerfold mirrors Rotate the 4 way adjustment switch to the center position Press the switch down to auto fold in and down again to auto fold back to design position Powerfold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash The mirrors may be moved inward outward manually If a mirror is moved manually it will need to be 76 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls reset To reset with the switch in the center position press the switch down to fold the mirrors in and wait a short period 8 seconds An audible click will be heard indicating re synchronization If the
303. olant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 5096 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 6096 308 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e A coolant concentration of 6096 will provide freeze point protection down to 62 F 52 C Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant
304. ollowed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message on may cause the Service Engine Soon lamp to turn on as well WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury 314 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Flex fuel vehicle FFV fuel fill inlet Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL Ed75 Ed85 The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if
305. omentum through the obstacle 245 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Basic operating principles e Do not use 4X4 mode on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces Use of 4X4 mode on these surfaces may produce some noise such as occasional clunks but will not damage drive components e Drive slower in strong crosswind
306. on Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death Using your vehicle with a snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Your vehicle is not equipped wi
307. on or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter To determine your average highway fuel economy do the following 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press RESET press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter MPG L km This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset TIMER Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and r
308. on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts WARNING Turn off the power running boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 295 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open
309. on again will turn off the stability control light In R Reverse ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Button Stability Engine Brake RUCHONS control RSC ESC traction traction light 8 control control Default at Illuminated start up during bulb Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled check Button pressed Sod Enabled Enabled oS enabled momentarily solid enabled enable Trailer sway control Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control When properly equipped trailer sway control will use the vehicle s AdvanceTrac with RSC system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and if necessary by reducing engine power WARNING Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high Pull the vehicle trailer over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing If trailer sway is experienced SLOW DOWN 230 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving During trailer sway co
310. on the vehicle and secure with four nuts 9 Install the interior trim panel 63 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing the high mount brake lamp To change the high mount brake lamp bulbs 1 Remove the two screws holding the lamp assembly in place 2 Pull the lamp assembly straight out 3 Disconnect the wire harness 4 Press the four tabs that hold the light assembly on one at a time and pull the black bulb carrier away from the lamp 5 Pull the old bulb out and replace with the new bulb 6 Snap the black bulb carrier into the lamp assembly 7 Connect the wire harness 8 Install the lamp assembly with two screws Replacing license plate lamp bulb The license plate bulbs are located in the license plate housing assembly on the liftgate To change the license plate bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Remove the license lamp screw from the assembly 3 Pull the lamp down and twist the bulb socket counterclockwise Remove the bulb socket from the lamp 4 Pull out the old bulb and push in the new bulb 5 Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise 6 Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw Replacing approach lamp mirror turn signal bulbs For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer 64
311. ond row seats are not reclined Folding down the 3rd row seats to the load floor WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the load floor position Before folding the third row seats fold the head restraints down by pulling on the strap located at the bottom of the restraint Pull up on the handle located es behind the seatback while pushing the seatback forward and down into the seat cushion To return the seatback to its original position lift the seatback until it latches into place WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 136 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Third row power folding seat if equipped Note Be sure that the head restraints are folded down before powering the 3rd row seat down The control buttons are located on the right hand rear quarter trim panel accessible from the liftgate area Press the bottom portion of the control button to lower the desired seatback Press the top of the control button to return the seatba
312. oors one on each side of the vehicle e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module ROM The Safety Canopy System in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event 159 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second or third row seats The safety canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The Safety Canopy System is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates safety canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The safety canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy System will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The safety canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the safety canopy did not activate in a collision
313. operation if equipped 6606000000000 Be sure to ask your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It s a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It s your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You ll know what s been checked what s okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 347 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide LIR eLm Multi Point Inspection Report Card as Recommended Ford Motor Company Tys Sb hoci lane me Er Bibi Mig Wee Modelo Nikap me ieia Bi Fik 15 59 _ teen Spork Page O rr m C uae tont Tories iv mobida d Ful Hier C imanen DO tr _ td erge Tison bad 1g ines hoses ey brake wet WOT cur Osnes Menus OF con Copa ela nis prd eda OOD OD wt DD ayatam eas image pets OO ee 0 ee I ea pedi State al Heal
314. ork The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable bag airbag with an inflator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Crash sensors located on the front doors and C pillars one sensor on each pillar on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation 157 2
315. ormal operating range o If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is c overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer Do not overfill the engine 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the upper hole or the MAX mark on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed 301 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark BL MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils certified for ga
316. ose To open the liftgate with the remote entry transmitter Press 25 twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks amd Security chapter 91 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To open the liftgate with outside liftgate control button manual actuation 1 Unlock the liftgate with the ENS remote entry transmitter or power door unlock control 2 Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note For the best performance allow the power system to open the liftgate after releasing the control button Continued upward force after unlatching may activate the obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation Note If weight is added to the gate bike rack snow etc the gate may automatically start a power close event immediately after a power open In this mode a unique continuous chime will sound To close the liftgate with the rear cargo area control button 5 Press and release the control on the left rear quarter panel to close the liftgate The chime will beep once if conditions are not correct to start an operation 1 the vehicle is out of park In a normal close the chime will begin just before the gate starts to move and continue for total of three seconds Note The rear cargo area control button is disabled
317. ou 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg 208 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9
318. oubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors two stage unlock 1 Press c and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps and parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature this feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned to the on position The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position 108 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the and controls on the IKT for four seconds disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The parking lamps will flash twice to indicate that two stage unlock was enabled or disabled Locking the doors 1 Press A and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will illuminate once if all the doors and liftgate are closed Note If any door or the liftgate is not closed or if the hood is not closed in vehicles equipped with the perimeter alarm feature the horn will chirp twice and the turn lamps will not flash Opening the
319. ound the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable fuel container see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system as it can be damaged You must use the included funnel in such circumstances WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank all of which could result in serious personal injury 273 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission ma
320. ously press and hold both the adjust release button and A the unlock remove button then pull up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks 4 Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position J WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly 122 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Using the power lumbar support The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press the forward side of the control for additional support Press the rear side of the control to reduce support Adjusting the front power seat WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop fi WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in se
321. ow tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Solid warning light Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to under inflated ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn off Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire 15 installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated malfunction and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 200 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Flashing warning Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your ti
322. placements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon C indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment 321 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine
323. power liftgate 25 Press 25 twice within three seconds to open the power liftgate This control will not unlatch the liftgate window WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the control To close the power liftgate press the control twice If the power liftgate stops mid travel it may have detected an obstacle Check to ensure the power liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the power assist by manually closing the power liftgate Normal operation can then be resumed WARNING Make sure the power liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm 109 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm The horn will sound and the turn lamps will flash for a maximum of three minutes Press again or turn the ignition to the on position to deactivate or wait for the alarm to time out in three minutes Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Memory feature sea
324. pposite end of the vehicle from the wheel being changed If on a grade block both opposite wheels on the downward side of the hill If the vehicle slips off the jack someone could be seriously injured e Front e Rear WARNING Turn off the running boards if equipped before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury 270 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point WARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 8 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 9 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown and reinstall the wheel cover 11 Unblock the wheels 12 Put flat tire jack lug wrench and tools away Make sure the jack is fastened securely so it does not rattle when you drive 13 Turn on the air suspensio
325. proaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information TOP SPEED MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey M is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac system and the optional setting is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 29 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS AM FM In dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system 44 REV SCAN c ERE e Tes TII WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary respo
326. programmed as MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section 101 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Potential Causes Cannot clear MyKey e Key in the ignition is a MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed MyKey Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Lost the only admin key e Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer Lost any key e For programming spare keys refer to the Programming spare keys section in this chapter I accidentally programmed all e Vehicle has a remote start system keys as MyKeys that is recognized as an admin key Refer to the Using MyKey with remote start systems section to reset all MyKeys as admin keys MyKey Programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed includes one additional key to the vehicle as a MyKey e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section Admin Keys Programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed includes one additional key to the vehicle as admin key e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems section MyKey miles do not e MyKey is not being used by the accumulate intended user e MyKey system has been
327. provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Transmission operates in 1st gear only e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Drive only e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC it may be beneficial to turn the system off so the wheels are allowed to spin 237 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving FORWARD AND REVERSE SENSING SYSTEMS The forward and reverse sensing system will warn the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the front and rear bumpers The front sensors will be active when the gearshift is in any position other than P Park or N Neutral and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph 13
328. quired Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or 6 months Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km 6 months or 200 hours of engine operation Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km 356 Replace cabin air filter if equipped Replace engine air filter Inspect brake system Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped with grease fittings Rotate fires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Inspect and lubricate U joints Change engine oil and filter Replace fuel filter Ranger Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 and TorgShift transmissions Replace front wheel bearing grease grease seals if non sealed bearings are used 2WD vehicles Change transfer case fluid 4WD vehicles Replace spark plugs 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Inspect frequently service as required Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or 6 months Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Every 50 000 miles 80 000 km Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Replace cabin air fil
329. r towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the RSC system the stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle 229 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Switching off traction control If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off the traction control features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the traction control feature press the stability control button Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by pressing the stability control button again or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the traction control the stability control light will illuminate steadily Pressing the stability control butt
330. r adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is factory equipped with an engine block heater a ed 7 rubber cap plug assembly will be visibly attached to the grille on the front of the vehicle For factory equipped this assembly is loose shipped in vehicle for authorized dealer installation If not factory equipped the engine block heater can be purchased through authorized dealer accessories Replacement rubber caps are available through an authorized dealer 3L1Z 6E088 AA An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C For flexible fuel vehicles if operating with Eg ethanol an engine block heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0 F 18 C See Cold weather starting in the Driving chapter for more information on starting with ethanol 221 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury
331. r vents 10 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents 11 A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents 12 Manual override controls Allows you to manually select where airflow is distributed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 13 8 Front fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 14 OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off 15 Driver temperature control Press to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver side of the cabin Sets the passenger side temperature also when DUAL is disengaged Note The recommended vehicle cabin setting is between 72 F 22 and 75 F 24 e Dual temperature control Press and hold AUTO to engage disengage separate passenger side temperature control 16 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 17 EXT Press to display the outside temperature Press again to display the cabin temperature settings Note Exterior readings are more accurate when the vehicle is moving 49 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 18 REAR Press to
332. rcury vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding Special Operating Conditions listed below you will need to have some items maintained more frequently If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier Inspect frequently service as Inspect and lubricate U oints required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and filter 6 months Inspect and lubricate U joints Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except 6880 and TorqShift amp transmissions Replace front wheel bearing grease grease seals if non sealed bearings are used 2WD vehicles Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Change transfer case fluid 4WD vehicles 355 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Extensive idling and or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery Inspect frequently service as re
333. rd with the 110V AC power point since it will defeat the safety protection design provided by the cap and twist tab Doing so my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150W load limit and could result in fire or serious injury The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted For overloading and shorting conditions unplug your device and turn the ignition key off then on For an overheating condition let the system cool off then turn the ignition key off then on 72 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The 110V AC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle ignition is in the on position and the power point green indicator light located in the top left corner is turned on Refer to the indicator light code below for the power point status Indicator light codes Green light is on Power point is ready to supply power Green light is off Power point power supply is off Ignition is not in the on position Green light is blinking Power point is in fault mode POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window ope
334. re e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time 60 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Number of bulbs See your dealer 3057K or 4057K 2 2 2 2 906 amber 2 W5W A6224PF Slide on rail system SOR replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer For vehicles with HID high intensity discharge lamps see your authorized dealer for service Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing HID headlamp bulbs The low high beam headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage The bulb is NOT customer replaceable When the bulb is burned out the bulb must be replaced by your authorized dealer Function Headlamps low and high beam Front park lamps Front turn lamps F
335. re saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the side of the driver s seat Gf equipped with memory feature Refer to Seating in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory recall it will cancel the automatic operation and the column will respond to manual adjustment of the control WARNING Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving 67 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls On vehicles with memory feature to prevent damage to the steering column the steering column is designed to set a stopping position just short of the end of the column position If the steering column encounters an object while moving up or down a new stopping position will be set To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position e After encountering the new stopping position press the steering column control again to override e Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column position e A new soft stop will be automatically set The next time the steering column is tilted it will stop just short of the end of the column position ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp
336. required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e n the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs Control Trac four wheel drive system if equipped When a
337. res are properly inflated malfunction and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 32 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully
338. reviously programmed coded keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 3 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the 2 ignition 4 2 Turn the ignition from the 1 off D position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position 1 for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the first coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position insert the second previously coded key into the ignition Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully progr
339. rized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introducti
340. ront sidemarker Fog lamps Front row map lamps 2nd row reading lamp Rear cargo lamp Rear turn tail brake Backup lamps Supplemental tail lamps Approach lamps Mirror turn signal lamps Number of bulbs _ HEN _ EC quud License lamp High mount brake lamp Visor vanity lamp 61 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker bulbs The front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker bulbs are located in the headlamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace either bulb 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the hood 3 At the back of the headlamp lens remove the two headlamp assembly bolts 4 Pull the headlamp assembly forward slightly to expose the electrical connectors Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove 6 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 7 To complete installation of the parking lamp turn signal assembly follow the removal procedures in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 From underneath the vehicle rotate the harness bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove from the fog lamp assembly 2 Carefully disconnect the bulb from the harness assembly via the two snap clips Install the new bulb in reverse order 62 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights
341. rp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Message center procedure For information on activating deactivating the autounlock feature using the vehicle s message center refer to Message center information in the Instrument Cluster chapter 106 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS Childproof door locks prevent opening of the rear doors from inside the vehicle regardless of the state of the main locks locked or unlocked The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock Move control down to disengage childproof locks REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The integrated keyhead transmitter IK
342. s 56 Dipstick automatic transmission omen 325 engine 300 Driving under special conditions 237 247 250 MM MUR 249 snow and ice 251 through water 249 252 E Electronic message center 20 Emergencies roadside jump starting 274 running out of fuel 273 316 Emission control system 321 ENENG iier tries 334 335 CLEANING 289 305 fail safe cooling 309 idle speed control 303 lubrication specifications 331 refill capacities 331 service 297 starting after a collision 255 Engine block heater 221 Emgrnie oll 15 3 entrer rt gees 300 checking and adding 300 300 filter specifications 302 330 recommendations 302 365 Index refill capacities specifications Event data recording Exhaust fumes F Fail safe cooling Fleet MyKey programming Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 31 FOOL MAAUS Uteris int Fluid capacities Fog lamps esit Four Wheel Drive vehicles C
343. s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 185 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing fla
344. s and starts to close after a open request a fast continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster chime have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the power system will permit This will activate the obstacle detection feature Note Cycling the ignition prior to completely latching the liftgate could result in damage to the liftgate and or its power components Make sure the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully closed latched If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close cycle and the liftgate is 6 10 inches 15 24 cm from being latched the liftgate may reverse to the full open position Verify that the gate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure The liftgate or it components could be damaged in an enclosure if the liftgate is open When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32 F 0 C the liftgate may stop about 5 inches 12 7 cm from the full open position The liftgate can be fully opened by pressing it upward to the maximum open position To open the liftgate from the instrument panel Press the button once to open the e liftgate press it again to cl
345. s which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e t may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly 246 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e t often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road
346. se decrease the temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle 4 y Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 5 2 Rear fan speed control Press to enable the auxiliary system or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed When the rear fan button is pressed the display will show only the rear cabin settings After the rear setting changes are completed on the front control the display will automatically show all climate settings 48 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 6 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air can be engaged manually in any airflow selection except 7 Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow selections A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with lt recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO GV defrost and floor defrost 8 V Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents and floor vents 9 A Distributes air through the floo
347. seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS IF EQUIPPED Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner Remove fresh spots immediately Clean the seat with a damp cloth using a mild soap and water solution if necessary LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING EDITION For King Ranch leather seats refer to a separate section in this chapter e Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather 292 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Print
348. section Programming MyKey optional settings Turn the ignition on using an admin key To program the optional settings use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus The first menu shown is MYKEY MAX MPH lt 80 MPH gt OFF 3 If you don t want to change the maximum speed setting press the SETUP button to display the next menu The remaining menus appear as follows with the default settings shown MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 lt gt MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT ON OFF MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON lt OFF gt 4 On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the eters 5 Press SETUP to enter your choice The next optional setting will be displayed 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional settings Clear MyKey To reset all MyKeys as admin keys do the following 1 Turn the vehicle on using the admin key 2 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed 99 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR is displayed 4 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed Check MyKey system status The vehicle system check will provide the status of the following MyKey parameters e MYK
349. sible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
350. soline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 302 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Mainte
351. ssage center in the Driver Controls chapter 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line 57 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp then use a Phillips 2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust down or clockwise to adjust up aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE 7 Repeat Steps 3 5 for the other headlamp 8 Close the hood and
352. st provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below In the third row center seating position the tether anchor is a loop at the bottom of the seatback 172 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e Second row bench seat v e Second row bucket seats v Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere o
353. stralia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on the Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Li touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the autho
354. sult in vehicle structural damage loss of vehicle control and personal injury Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition in the on position and all doors closed allow the vehicle to stand without passengers for several minutes so that it can level 2 Turn the air suspension if equipped control to off 3 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 4 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within a 1 2 in 13 mm of the reference point After proper adjustment the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 3 5 Turn the air suspension if equipped control to on 213 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow sla
355. system During start up of the climate control seat system a slight difference in seat surface temperature may be perceived between the seat cushion and seat back until the cabin and seat temperatures stabilize If the vehicle air conditioning system is run in floor mode the effect may be more pronounced Switching between seat heat and seat cool modes in alternate succession will delay the time it takes for the seat temperatures back and cushion to stabilize The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the dual electronic automatic temperature control DEATC system 125 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Heated seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on
356. t Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire infla
357. t information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 254 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH The fuel pump shut off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt After a collision if the engine cranks but does not start the fuel pump shut off switch may have been activated The fuel pump shut off switch is located behind an access panel in the left rear quarter trim panel near the liftgate The fuel pump shut off switch has a red reset button on top of it If your vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate the fuel pump shut off switch will be left of the power liftgate motor
358. t mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column The transmitter allows you to recall the memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column feature Press C to automatically move the seat power mirrors adjustable pedals and steering column to the desired memory position The mirrors will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition if easy entry feature is enabled Programming memory feature to transmitter To activate this feature 1 Move the driver seat power mirrors adjustable pedal and steering column to the desired positions using the associated controls 2 Press and hold the control button 1 for five seconds A tone will be heard after about two seconds Ly 2 confirming memory position has been set Continue to hold until second tone is heard after five seconds 3 Within three seconds press the a 4 A tone will be heard when the transmitter programming is complete 5 Press the 3 6 Repeat this procedure for memory 2 and another transmitter if desired Deprogramming memory feature from transmitter To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door for five seconds A tone will be heard after 142 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 110 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide
359. t tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 252 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 51 of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mer
360. t and rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the sensing system If your vehicle sustains damage to the front or rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM The camera system located on the liftgate provides a video image which appears in the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen if equipped of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle To use the camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen if equipped The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition 1 Rear bumper 2 Red zone P 4 3 Yell O 5 Centerline of vehicle Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones 241 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sid
361. t be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and distilled water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is coo
362. t data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel
363. t does not illuminate momentarily at start up remains on or continues to flash the ABS needs to be serviced With the ABS light on the anti lock brake system is disabled and normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains BRAKE illuminated with parking brake released If your brake warning lamp illuminates have your vehicle serviced immediately 224 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the parking brake is released O BRAKE WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing
364. t equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident 141 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Front and re
365. t to wash the area regularly in order to maintain the system s optimal operation Exterior chrome Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A 287 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS A
366. t trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 196 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires type tires have some additional information beyond those of type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size RAR 58006 1051 Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on Ass cars SUVs minivans and light Ay S 09 0199 trucks Vo asn 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower
367. t vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating C E H temperature the needle will be in os the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 18 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in this chapter for information on how to switch the 888888ni display from Metric to English Trip odometer See TRIP A B under Message center in this chapter Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine E XE x 3 4 2 RPM X 1000 A Pd A Fuel gauge Indicates 1 LA approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition E 4 is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehi
368. t weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel when exterior RUN lights are on e Rotate the thumbwheel from left to right to brighten the instrument panel e Rotate the thumbwheel from right to left to dim the instrument panel e Rotate fully to the right past detent to turn on interior lamps 56 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights e Rotate to the left position past detent to turn off the interior lamps and to disable the illuminated entry feature When the control is in the far left position it acts as a dome lamp defeat override Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full dome on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Vertical aim adjustment Before aim adjustment disable the air suspension system Refer to Me
369. ter if equipped Replace engine air filter Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Change engine oil and filter Inspect and lubricate U joints Replace fuel filter Ranger Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 and TorqShift amp transmissions Replace front wheel bearing grease grease seals if non sealed bearings are used 2WD vehicles Change manual transmission fluid Change rear axle lubricant E450 and F 450 550 only Change transfer case fluid 4WD vehicles 357 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Off road operation Inspect frequently service as required Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or 6 months Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Every 50 000 miles 80 000 km Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Inspect steering linkage ball joints and Ujoints lubricate if equipped with grease fittings Replace cabin air filter if equipped Replace engine air filter Change engine oil and filter Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate fires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 and TorqShift transmissions Replace front wheel bearing grease grease seals if non sealed bearings are used 2WD vehicles Change manual transm
370. teries 1H iie nent 135 Reverse sensing system 238 memory seat 110 125 368 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus SecuriCode keyless entry SyS cotes ni DM 113 SecuriLock passive anti theft 114 Servicing your vehicle 295 Snowplowing 6 SOS Post Crash Alert 161 Spark plugs specifications 330 334 335 Special notice utility type vehicles 6 Specification chart lubricants 331 Speed control 80 Stability system 226 Starting a flex fuel vehicle 220 Starting your vehicle 217 220 jump starting 274 Steering wheel so sist oerte een 82 HINE derer ous 67 47 T Third row power fold seat 137 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS iugi qr 249 Tires Wheels and Loading 198 Warning Displays 12 26 183 185 264 alignment eee 192 GALE EN 188 CHANGING i ceperint 264 268 checking the pressure 188 MAAE 186 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus label 197 T Dlaelng onte ege 190 uscire epe 192 safety practices 191 sidewall information 193 snow tires and chains
371. th if misused or mishandled WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before fueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours e Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury 811 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor
372. th Candition di vob Py E di bor E apps TPS EST ET Ubiksk a5 d Factory spec cran raps elton rans Mis adanc kapis LM siy n eat i mpor oper bon andes per blares osos cp sat piti ng E i iens ace ra oss nor dum mie cong sten ion itc mcs nat cage snay chive be acetate Lum tun an ar AP fing wee SA paa TRETREAD gt t d i NH I E 9 m rnc opa arit a Tre Won Pal erm Di rage m voa ram tane irre sot blackeye 9 Tre rozar bo boy ommended PA JE urg m 37 1 TL TE mese aim rap m voa rane tane ceo orco ornnes ra porerne pa Hoe EE Corrurib Customer Signature 2 000 Y Customer Copy 12 NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG The following section contains the Normal Schedule This schedule is presented at specific mileage kilometer intervals with exceptions noted 348 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide 181 SOUIOD JOAO9UOTUAN
373. th a snowplowing package 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only if equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of ti
374. th the optional trailer tow package the maximum frontal area of trailer should not exceed 60 ft 5 6 m For load specification terms found on the label refer to Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in this chapter Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury 211 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer hitch cover Your vehicle is equipped with a removable trailer hitch trim cover To remove the trim cover 1 Loosen the two 4 turn fasteners in the bottom of the cover by turning them counterclockwise Pull the cover downward to remove it the fasteners will remain attached to the cover 2 To reinstall the cover insert the four plastic tabs on top of the cover into the corresponding slots as shown in the illustration and push the cover up into the bumper trim 3 Hold the cover against the bumper trim and reinstall the two V4 turn fasteners by turning them clockwise Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as
375. the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT Terrain or AS Season 194 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur
376. the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt For second row seating positions if needed the recliner may be adjusted slightly to improve child seat fit 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 168 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to p
377. the vent position automatically from any moon roof position Press the switch again to stop the moon roof Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moon roof The moon roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which can be used to replace the common hand held transmitter Car2U Home Automation System if equipped The Car2U Home Automation System is a universal transmitter located in the driver s visor that e Q Q includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home The Car2U system s garage door opener function replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the interior of your vehicle After being programmed for garage doors the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems WARNING Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garag
378. ther than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Second row seating positions 1 For center seating positions route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts If the top of the safety seat hits the head restraint recline the seatback slightly to obtain proper fit 173 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position e Second row outboard seating positions e Second row center seating position if equipped 3 Grasp the tether strap and po EE position it to the seat frame 4 Rotate the tether strap and clip the tether s
379. time an obstacle is only six inches 15 cm from the rear of the vehicle the lower pitched tone will sound The reverse sensing portion of the system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while e the vehicle is in R Reverse and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e the vehicle is in R Reverse but not moving and a moving object is approaching the front or rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e the vehicle is in R Reverse and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is automatically enabled when the gearshift lever is placed in D Drive or R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the forward if equipped and or reverse system Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information The message center will indicate a failure in the forward or reverse system and will not allow the driver to switch the faulted system on 240 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information The system defaults to enabled every time the ignition is switched on Press the control to disable or enable the system Keep the sensors located on the fron
380. tion has been turned to the off position e If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position e If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors or the liftgate was opened the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position e The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position 112 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without using a key e activate or deactivate the Autolock feature if equipped e release the liftgate glass The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create your own 5b digit personal entry code When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Programming your own personal entry code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that the system is in programming mode 3
381. tion pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door 186 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven mor
382. tions or on loose gravel bumps wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle s anti lock brake system The ABS performs a self check after you start the engine and begin to drive away A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test This is normal If a malfunction is found the ABS warning light will come on If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied Using ABS e n an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four wheel ABS is required apply continuous force on the brake The four wheel ABS will be activated immediately thus allowing you to retain steering control of your vehicle and providing there is sufficient space will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop e The anti lock system does not always reduce stopping distance Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop e We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique However avoid taking any unnecessary risks ABS warning lamp The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the ligh
383. tire cover or is included with the tire changing tools 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the Easy Fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle 317 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 8 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty
384. tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible AIR SUSPENSION OFF if equipped Displayed when the air suspension is off For more information refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 27 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 1096 or less When oil life left is between 1096 and 096 the XX OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON message will be displayed OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 096 CHECK AIR SUSPENSION if equipped Displayed when the air suspension system is not operating properly If this message is displayed while driving pull off the road as soon as safely possible For more information refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter
385. tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability 265 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability if applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface activate the hazard flashers and set the parking brake 2 Place the gearshift in P Park and turn the engine off Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations Location Spare tire Under the vehicle just forward of the rear bumper Jack tools and jacking instructions Under the access panel located in the floor compartment behind the rear seat 266 2011 Navigator n
386. to the load floor position 3 To return the seat to the upright position lift the seatback until the 4 latch is fully engaged WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that 9 P cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seatback aer After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjusting the 2nd row center 20 seat if equipped Lift the handle to move the seat forward or backward Note This seat can be moved forward to keep a child in a child restraint close to the front seat occupants The seat should be moved to the full rearward position when it is occupied by older children or adults including children in booster seats 134 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Rear heated seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may c
387. transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad e Turn ignition to the on position with a valid programmed SecuriLock key or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT e Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding The alarm system will still be armed e If using a key in the driver s door to unlock the vehicle a chime will sound when you open the door and you will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm system using any of the actions above otherwise the alarm will trigger Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state Triggering the anti theft system The armed system will be triggered if e Any door the hood or the liftgate is opened without using the keypad or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT e The ignition is turned to the on position with an invalid unprogrammed SecuriLock key or IKT 119 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until
388. trap to the anchor on the seat frame 174 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Rotate the tether strap clip 6 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions Third row center seating position 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat E e N 2 Locate the anchor webbing loop for the seating position e You may need to pull back the top of the hinged panel along the bottom of the seat back to access the tether anchor KK AL XI PA HAI A RIAM 175 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Clip the tether strap through the anchor loop as shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Chil
389. ty seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 180 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Util
390. u are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel e Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position 313 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Easy Fuel no cap fuel system Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel no cap fuel filler system This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system The Easy Fuel system is self sealing and protected against dust dirt water and snow ice When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping Pump
391. uipped with an automatic one touch express opening and closing feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time To open the moon roof Press and release the SLIDE control and the moon roof will open automatically to the comfort position Press and Dis release again to fully open Press the switch again to stop the moon roof WARNING When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening To close the moon roof Pull and release the SLIDE control the moon roof will close automatically Press the switch again to stop the moon roof 83 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Bounce back When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the moon roof is closing the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a prescribed position Bounce back override To override bounce back function pull and hold the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce back event The closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for the first three closing cycles with bounce back active For example Bounce back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon roof or seals To vent the moon roof Press and release the TILT control the moon roof will move to
392. ull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 169 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower An
393. under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 179 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraints and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safe
394. unning boards will move to the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors e When this feature is enabled AUTO the running boards will move back to the correct positions based off of the door positions Bounce back e If an object is in the way of the moving running board the running board will automatically bounce back in the reverse direction and move to the end of travel Note The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures In adverse conditions debris such as mud dirt and salt may become trapped in the running board mechanism possibly leading to unwanted noise If this occurs manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flush the system in particular the front and rear hinge arms with a high pressure car wash wand Note Do not use the running boards front and rear hinge assemblies running board motors or the running board under body mounts to lift the vehicle when jacking Please utilize proper jacking points Refer to Changing the tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter WARNING In extreme climates excessive ice buildup may occur causing the running boards not to deploy Be sure that the running boards have deployed and have finished moving before attempting to step on them Note The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared WARNING Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your han
395. until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when Co the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately 324 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission
396. uster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection 290 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commerci
397. utton is pressed or three minutes has expired the display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the compass heading until the compass is calibrated ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH RESET FOR NEW Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish or French Press RESET to cycle through each of the language choices Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver door is not completely closed 26 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Pri
398. v Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Transmission Tow Haul Feature TOW RTT Illuminates when the HAUL Tow Haul feature has been activated Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation If the light flashes steadily have the system serviced immediately damage to the transmission could occur AdvanceTrac if equipped Displays when the AdvanceTrac f with RSC system is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated 4X2 RTT if equipped Displays momentarily when 4 2 two wheel drive high is selected If x the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on or remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Four wheel drive RTT if 4 4 equipped Displays when four wheel drive is engaged If the light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on or remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Four wheel drive auto RTT if equipped Displays when 4x4 four wheel drive automatic mode is AUTO engaged If the light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on or remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer 16 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
399. vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature 105 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chi
400. vere personal injuries in the event of a collision The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Move the switch in the direction of the arrows to raise or lower the 5 front portion of the seat cushion AC 123 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Move the switch in the direction of the arrows to raise or lower the rear 4 portion of the seat cushion Press the switch in the direction of the arrows to move the seat forward backward up or down Press the control to recline the seatback forward or rearward Note On vehicles with memory seats to prevent damage to the seat the power seats are designed to set a stopping position just short of the end of the seat track If the seat encounters an object while moving forward or backward a new stopping position will be set To reset the seat to its normal stopping position e After encountering the new stopping position press the power seat control again to override e Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the seat track e Continue pressing the control for approximately two seconds You will feel the seat bounce back slightly 124 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals steering column This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat
401. w wiring Both a Class I 4 pin and IV 7 pin trailer electrical connector are provided Under the instrument panel a electrical connector is provided for a customer supplied aftermarket electronic brake controller For installing a customer supplied electronic brake controller a electrical jumper harness and trailer tow electrical instructions are included with the optional trailer tow package The kit containing a electrical jumper and trailer tow electrical instructions may be purchased from any authorized dealer part number 4L1Z 14A348 AA 210 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Before towing a trailer make sure the trailer brakes if equipped and lamps are properly connected and functional If equipped with electronic trailer brakes refer to the instructions provided by the aftermarket electronic brake controller manufacturer for determining trailer brake functionality Engine Tow Package Maximum GCWR Ib Maximum Trailer kg Weight Ib kg Navigator 4x2 5 4L Standard 6000 2721 5 4L Optional 9000 4082 Navigator L 4x2 5 4L Standard 6000 2721 5 4L Optional 8700 3946 Navigator 4x4 5 4L Standard 6000 2721 5 4L Optional 8700 3946 Navigator L 4x4 5 4L Standard 12500 5670 6000 2721 Note For vehicles with the standard trailer tow package the maximum frontal area of trailer should not exceed 36 5 ft 3 4 m For vehicles equipped wi
402. when the liftgate is latched fully closed WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with second press of the instrument panel or the rear cargo area control button or a second double press of the remote entry transmitter button 92 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To manually operate the liftgate Disable the liftgate power function refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note In the event of a power failure the latch can be accessed and released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim To open the liftgate push the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate then pull on the outside handle to access the cargo area e Do not open the liftgate or liftgate glass in a garage or other enclosed area with a low ceiling If the liftgate glass is raised and the liftgate is also opened both liftgate and glass could be damaged against a low ceiling e Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested Obstacle detection T
403. xed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon CY indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon K indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs 322 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Readiness for Inspection Maintenance testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD
404. y See your authorized dealer 158 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy System is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy How does the Safety Canopy System work The design and development of the Safety Canopy System included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working zx Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy System consists of the following Eo aly LEON 707 PRN ils U e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow safety canopy deployment A e An inflatable curtain with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors one on each side of vehicle e The same readiness airbag light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors one on each side of the vehicle e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear d
405. y and death 226 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the stability control light will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled press the stability control button located on the center of the instrument panel If the stability control light still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time the engine is started All
406. y cause transmission damage Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off 274 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Connecting the jumper cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positiv
407. y not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 193 2011 Navigator nav Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 7 Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the Speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 3177 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  CLJ 4500 Paper Jams & Troubleshooting  Sony MiniDisc Player MDS-JE480 B  www.philips.com/welcome  取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file